Search Results

Search found 13401 results on 537 pages for 'double checked'.

Page 531/537 | < Previous Page | 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537  | Next Page >

  • what is mistakes/errors in this code c++ tell me the correction ??

    - by jeje
    hello all here in this code the compiler print error : 132 C:.... `createlist' undeclared (first use this function) (Each undeclared identifier is reported only once for each function it appears in.) and repeat it again in all calls in main function :( what's the problem ?? plzzzz help me #include<iostream> #include<string> using namespace std; template <typename T> struct Node { T num; struct Node<T> *next; // to craet list nodes void createlist(Node<T> *p) { T data; for( ; ; ) // its containue until user want to stop { cout<<"enter data number or '#' to stop\n"; cin>>data; if(data == '#') { p->next =NULL; break; } else { p->num= data; p->next = new Node<T>; p=p->next; } } } //count list to use it in sort function int countlist (Node<T> *p) { int count=0; while(p->next != NULL) { count++; p=p->next; } return count; } // sort list void sort( Node<T> *p) { Node<T> *p1, *p2; //element 1 & 2 to compare between them int i, j , n; T temp; n= countlist(p); for( i=1; i<n ; i++) { // here every loop time we put the first element in list in p1 and the second in p2 p1=p; p2=p->next; for(j=1; j<=(n-i) ; j++) { if( p1->num > p2->num) { temp=p2->num; p2->num=p1->num; p1->num=temp; } } p1= p1->next; p2= p2->next; } } //add new number in any location the user choose void insertatloc(Node<T> *p) { T n; //read new num int loc; //read the choosen location Node<T> *locadd, *newnum, *temp; cout <<" enter location you want ..! \n"; cin>>loc; locadd=NULL; //make it null to checked if there is location after read it from user ot not while(p->next !=NULL) { if( p->next==loc) { locadd=p; break; } p=p->next; } if (locadd==NULL) {cout<<" cannot find the location\n";} else //if location is right {cout<<" enter new number\n"; // new number to creat also new location for it cin>>n; newnum= new Node/*<T>*/; newnum->num=n; temp= locadd->next; locadd->next=newnum; newnum->next=temp; } locadd->num=sort(locadd); // call sort function } // display all list nodes void displaylist (Node<T> *p) { while (p->next != NULL) { cout<<" the list contain:\n"; cout<<p->num<<endl; p=p->next; } } };//end streuct int main() { cout<<"*** Welcome in Linked List Sheet 2****\n"; // defined pointer for structer Node // that value is the address of first node struct Node<int>*mynodes= new struct Node<int>; // create nodes in mynodes list cout<<"\nCreate nodes in list"; createlist(mynodes); // insert node in location insertatloc(mynodes); /* count the number of all nodes nodescount = countlist(mynodes); cout<<"\nThe number of nodes in list is: "<<nodescount;*/ // sort nodes in list sort(mynodes); // Display nodes cout<<"\nDisplay all nodes in list:\n"; displaylist(mynodes); system("pause"); return 0; }

    Read the article

  • May be my example site may answer my question about ajax call... Help me

    - by booota
    Okay I have this ajax call $('.updatecom .registercomplaint').click(function(){ updatecomplaints(); }); This calls the function updatecomplaints() function updatecomplaints() { var tno = $(".updatecom #tno").val(); var status = $(".updatecom #status").val(); if(status=='DONE') { $(".updatecom #con").val(''); } var tname = $(".updatecom #tname").val(); var rg11 = $(".updatecom #crg11").val(); var rg06 = $(".updatecom #crg06").val(); var tvpins = $(".updatecom #tvpins").val(); var jointer = $(".updatecom #jointer").val(); var cquantity = $(".updatecom #conqty").val(); var nooftv = $(".updatecom #tvno").val(); var misc = $(".updatecom #misc").val(); var tcomments = $(".updatecom #tcomments").val(); var con = $(".updatecom #con").val(); //alert(tno+status+tname+rg11+rg06+tvpins+jointer+cquantity+nooftv+misc+tcomments+con); $.ajax( { type: "POST", url: "up_functions.php", data: "ticket="+ tno +"& opt=upcom" +"& status="+ status +"& tname="+ tname +"& rg11="+ rg11 +"& rg06="+ rg06 +"& tvpins="+ tvpins +"& jointer="+ jointer +"& cquantity="+ cquantity +"& nooftv="+ nooftv +"& misc="+ misc +"& tcomments="+ tcomments +"& con="+ con, success: function(response) { alert(response); } }); } here is my up_functions.php $tno = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['ticket'])); $status = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['status'])); $tname = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['tname'])); $rg11 = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['rg11'])); $rg06 = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['rg06'])); $tvpins = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['tvpins'])); $jointer = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['jointer'])); $cquantity = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['cquantity'])); $nooftv = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['nooftv'])); $misc = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['misc'])); $tcomments = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['tcomments'])); $con = htmlspecialchars(trim($_REQUEST['con'])); $result=$ptr-upcomticketinfo($tno,$status,$tname,$rg11,$rg06,$tvpins,$jointer,$cquantity,$nooftv,$misc,$tcomments,$con); echo $result; and here is my upconticketinfo() php function function upcomticketinfo($tno,$status,$tname,$rg11,$rg06,$tvpins,$jointer,$cquantity,$nooftv,$misc,$tcomments,$con) { if($con!='' || $con!=NULL) { $this-query = "update booking discription set STATUS='$status',CLOSED ON='$con' where TICKET NO='$tno'"; $this-q_result = mysql_query($this-query,$this-conn) or die(mysql_error()); if($this-q_result) { $query = "update tech detail set TECH NAME='$tname',CABLE RG11='$rg11',CABLE RG06='$rg06',TV PINS USED='$tvpins',JOINTER USED='$jointer',CONNECTOR QTY='$cquantity',NO OF TV='$nooftv',MISC='$misc',TECH COMMENTS='$tcomments' where BOOKING='$tno'"; $q_result = mysql_query($query,$this-conn) or die(mysql_error()); if($q_result) { $response = "updated"; } else { $response = "error"; } } else { $response = "error"; } } else { $this-query = "update booking discription set STATUS='$status' where TICKET NO='$tno'"; $this-q_result = mysql_query($this-query,$this-conn) or die(mysql_error()); if($this-q_result) { $query = "update tech detail set TECH NAME='$tname',CABLE RG11='$rg11',CABLE RG06='$rg06',TV PINS USED='$tvpins',JOINTER USED='$jointer',CONNECTOR QTY='$cquantity',NO OF TV='$nooftv',MISC='$misc',TECH COMMENTS='$tcomments' where BOOKING='$tno'"; $q_result = mysql_query($query,$this-conn) or die(mysql_error()); if($q_result) { $response = "updated"; } else { $response = "error"; } } else { $response = "error"; } } return $response; } Question is that, this code is working just fine in IE8 i.e i am using... but it is not working in FF 3.6.3... I have checked each n everything... One thing is that the code works fine on FF too only when i debug the page with firebug debugger. Otherwise the alert in ajax success shows itself with nothing in it... Help me... Goto link text Enter 6628 in the Ticket No. box under Update Complaint Status section... A new form will open. In that form press update... Try it in FF and IE... IE8 shows the results as needed but FF does not...

    Read the article

  • Parsing HTML using HTTP Agility Pack

    - by Pajci
    Here is one table out of 5: <h3>marec - maj 2009</h3> <div class="graf_table"> <table summary="layout table"> <tr> <th>DATUM</th> <td class="datum">10.03.2009</td> <td class="datum">24.03.2009</td> <td class="datum">07.04.2009</td> <td class="datum">21.04.2009</td> <td class="datum">05.05.2009</td> <td class="datum">06.05.2009</td> </tr> <tr> <th>Maloprodajna cena [EUR/L]</th> <td>0,96000</td> <td>0,97000</td> <td>0,99600</td> <td>1,00800</td> <td>1,00800</td> <td>1,01000</td> </tr> <tr> <th>Maloprodajna cena [SIT/L]</th> <td>230,054</td> <td>232,451</td> <td>238,681</td> <td>241,557</td> <td>241,557</td> <td>242,036</td> </tr> <tr> <th>Prodajna cena brez dajatev</th> <td>0,33795</td> <td>0,34628</td> <td>0,36795</td> <td>0,37795</td> <td>0,37795</td> <td>0,37962</td> </tr> <tr> <th>Trošarina</th> <td>0,46205</td> <td>0,46205</td> <td>0,46205</td> <td>0,46205</td> <td>0,46205</td> <td>0,46205</td> </tr> <tr> <th>DDV</th> <td>0,16000</td> <td>0,16167</td> <td>0,16600</td> <td>0,16800</td> <td>0,16800</td> <td>0,16833</td> </tr> </table> </div> I have to extract out values, where table header is DATUM and Maloprodajna cena [EUR/L]. I am using Agility HTML pack. this.htmlDoc = new HtmlAgilityPack.HtmlDocument(); this.htmlDoc.OptionCheckSyntax = true; this.htmlDoc.OptionFixNestedTags = true; this.htmlDoc.OptionAutoCloseOnEnd = true; this.htmlDoc.OptionOutputAsXml = true; // is this necessary ?? this.htmlDoc.OptionDefaultStreamEncoding = System.Text.Encoding.Default; I had a lot of trouble with getting those values out. I started with: var query = from html in doc.DocumentNode.SelectNodes("//div[@class='graf_table']").Cast<HtmlNode>() from table in html.SelectNodes("//table").Cast<HtmlNode>() from row in table.SelectNodes("tr").Cast<HtmlNode>() from cell in row.SelectNodes("th|td").Cast<HtmlNode>() select new { Table = table.Id, CellText = cell.InnerHtml }; but could not figure out a way to select only values where table header is DATUM and Maloprodajna cena[EUR/L]. Is it possible to do that with where clause? Then I ended with those two queries: var date = (from d in htmlDoc.DocumentNode.SelectNodes("//div[@class='graf_table']//table//tr[1]/td") select DateTime.Parse(d.InnerText)).ToArray(); var price = (from p in htmlDoc.DocumentNode.SelectNodes("//div[@class='graf_table']//table//tr[2]/td") select double.Parse(p.InnerText)).ToArray(); Is it possible to combine those two queries? And how would I convert that to lambda expression? I just started to learn those things and I would like to know how it is done so that in the future I would not have those question. O, one more question ... does anybody know any graph control, cause I have to show those values in graph. I started with Microsoft Chart Controls, but I am having trouble with setting it. So if anyone has any experience with it I would like to know how to set it, so that x axle will show all values not every second ... example: if I have: 10.03.2009, 24.03.2009, 07.04.2009, 21.04.2009, 05.05.2009, 06.05.2009 it show only: 10.03.2009, 07.04.2009, 05.05.2009, ect. I bind data to graph like that: chart1.Series["Series1"].Points.DataBindXY(date, price); I lot of questions for my fist post ... hehe, hope that I was not indistinct or something. Thank's for any reply!

    Read the article

  • Cascading dropdowns

    - by SnowJim
    Hi! I am working with cascading dropdowns in MVC. It appears that I will not be able to easily create dropdowns on demand, instead I will have to add the dropdowns before sending it to the client. This is how I am doing it right now: In the aspx page <%: Html.DropDownListFor(model => model.ModelViewAd.Category1, Model.ModelViewAd.Category1List, "-- Välj kategori --")%> <%: Html.DropDownListFor(model => model.ModelViewAd.Category2, Model.ModelViewAd.Category2List, "-- Välj kategori --")%> <%: Html.DropDownListFor(model => model.ModelViewAd.Category3, Model.ModelViewAd.Category3List, "-- Välj kategori --")%> <%: Html.DropDownListFor(model => model.ModelViewAd.Category4, Model.ModelViewAd.Category4List, "-- Välj kategori --")%> This is rendered like this : <select id="ModelViewAd_Category1" name="ModelViewAd.Category1"> <option value="">-- V&#228;lj kategori --</option> <option value="10">Fordon</option> <option value="15">F&#246;r hemmet</option> <option value="17">Bostad</option> </select> <select id="ModelViewAd_Category2" name="ModelViewAd.Category2"> <option value="">-- V&#228;lj kategori --</option> </select> <select id="ModelViewAd_Category3" name="ModelViewAd.Category3"> <option value="">-- V&#228;lj kategori --</option> </select> <select id="ModelViewAd_Category4" name="ModelViewAd.Category4"> <option value="">-- V&#228;lj kategori --</option> </select> This is what the script on the page looks like: <script type="text/javascript"> $(function () { $("select#ModelViewAd_Category1").change(function () { var id = $(this).val(); var urlAction = "/AdCategory/GetCategoriesByParent1/" + id; $.getJSON(urlAction, { id: id }, function (data) { $("#ModelViewAd_Category2").addItems(data.d); }); }); $("select#ModelViewAd_Category2").change(function () { var id = $(this).val(); var urlAction = "/AdCategory/GetCategoriesByParent1/" + id; $.getJSON(urlAction, { id: id }, function (data) { $("#ModelViewAd_Category3").addItems(data.d); }); }); $("select#ModelViewAd_Category3").change(function () { var id = $(this).val(); var urlAction = "/AdCategory/GetCategoriesByParent1/" + id; $.getJSON(urlAction, { id: id }, function (data) { $("#ModelViewAd_Category4").addItems(data.d); }); }); }); </script> And then I have an included file that contains this: $.fn.clearSelect = function () { return this.each(function () { if (this.tagName == 'SELECT') this.options.length = 0; }); } $.fn.addItems = function (data) { return this.clearSelect().each(function () { if (this.tagName == 'SELECT') { var dropdownList = this; $.each(data, function (index, optionData) { var option = new Option(optionData.Text, optionData.Value); if ($.browser.msie) { dropdownList.add(option); } else { dropdownList.add(option, null); } if ($(this).children().size() < 2) { $(this).hide(); } else { $(this).show(); } }); } }); } The problem I now have is that I need to hide the dropdowns that do not contain any options or only contain one option. This should be checked when doing a call to the service as well as when the page is sent to the client ("POSTBACK"). What I need is : 4 Dropdowns Only the first dropdown is visible when first entering the page. When selecting an option from dropdown1 the dropdown2 will be populated and so on If there is only 1 option then the dropdown should be hidden If all 4 dropdowns are set and the end-user changes dropdown1, then dropdown2 should be reloaded and the rest be hidden If the user has selected some of the dropdowns (say 1, 2 and 3) and hit submit and the page is not accepted on the server side (not valid) the dropdowns should be set exactly as when the user clicked the submit button when the page returns to the user. Any suggestions on this?

    Read the article

  • Javascript form validation only works in firefox

    - by Logic Artist
    Hello, I am relatively new to Javascript so I'm hoping this is a simple mistake. I building a generic form validation function that is called on the form's onSubmit. The function loops through all the form's child elements, looks for certain classes, and analyzes the contents of the appropriate fields. If it finds something missing or erroneous, it displays the appropriate error message div and returns false, thus preventing the form from being submitted to the php page. It works well in firefox 3.6.3, but in every other browser I've tested (Safari 4.0.4, Chrome 4.1, IE8) it seems to ignore the onSubmit and jump straight to the php processing page. HTML CODE: <form name='myForm' id='myForm' action='process_form.php' method='post' onSubmit="return validateRequired('myForm')"> <fieldset class="required radioset"> <label for='selection1'> <input type='radio' name='selection' id='selection1' value='1'/> Option 1 </label> <label for='selection2'> <input type='radio' name='selection' id='selection2' value='2'/> Option 2 </label> <label for='selection3'> <input type='radio' name='selection' id='selection3' value='3'/> Option 3 </label> <label for='selection4'> <input type='radio' name='selection' id='selection4' value='4'/> Option 4 </label> <div class='errorBox' style='visibility:hidden'> Please make a selection </div> </fieldset> <fieldset class="required checkset"> <label> Choice 1 <input type='checkbox' name='choices' id='choice1' value='1'/> </label> <label> Choice 2 <input type='checkbox' name='choices' id='choice2' value='2'/> </label> <label> Choice 3 <input type='checkbox' name='choices' id='choice3' value='3'/> </label> <label> Choice 4 <input type='checkbox' name='choices' id='choice4' value='4'/> </label> <div class='errorBox' style='visibility:hidden'> Please choose at least one </div> </fieldset> <fieldset class="required textfield" > <label for='textinput1'> Required Text: <input type='text' name='textinput1' id='textinput1' size='40'/> </label> <div class='errorBox' style='visibility:hidden'> Please enter some text </div> </fieldset> <fieldset class="required email textfield"> <label for='email'> Required Email: <input type='text' name='email' id='email' size='40'/> </label> <div class='errorBox' style='visibility:hidden'> The email address you have entered is invalid </div> </fieldset> <div> <input type='submit' value='submit'> <input type='reset' value='reset'> </div> </form> JAVASCRIPT CODE: function validateRequired(id){ var form = document.getElementById(id); var errors = 0; var returnVal = true; for(i = 0; i < form.elements.length; i++){ var elem = form.elements[i]; if(hasClass(elem,"required")){ /*RADIO BUTTON or CHECK BOX SET*/ if(hasClass(elem,"radioset") || hasClass(elem,"checkset")){ var inputs = elem.getElementsByTagName("input"); var check = false; for(j = 0; j < inputs.length; j++){ if(inputs[j].checked){ check = true; } } if(check == false){ errors += 1; showError(elem); } else { hideError(elem); } } /*TEXT FIELD*/ else if(hasClass(elem,"textfield")){ var input = elem.getElementsByTagName("input"); if(input[0].value == ""){ errors += 1; showError(elem); } else { hideError(elem); /*EMAIL ADDRESS*/ if(hasClass(elem,"email")){ if(isValidEmail(input[0].value) == false){ errors += 1; showError(elem); } else { hideError(elem); } } } } } } if(errors > 0){ returnVal = false; } else { returnVal = true; } return returnVal;} I know this is a lot of code to look at, but any help would be appreciated. Since it works fine in one browser, Im not sure how to start debugging. Thanks Andrew

    Read the article

  • I can NOT submit the form

    - by buri kuri
    Hey guys Im trying to develop an advance consumer website using php and I stuck somewhere while trying to get the data with submitting to another page. All I want to do is to get the checkbox values which are stored in an array and checked by user. I urgently need your help please here is the code: $sql2="SELECT * FROM alinanfis WHERE alinanfis.fis_id='".$fis."'" ; $resultFis=mysql_query($sql2); if(mysql_num_rows($resultFis)>0) { print "<form method='POST' action='deletionResult.php'>"; print "<table>"; print "<tr>"; print "<th style='background: transparent;'></th>"; print "<th>Fis No</th>"; print "<th>isim</th>"; print "<th>soyisim</th>"; print "<th >Tarih</th>"; print "<th>Fis Tipi</th>"; print "<th>Nerede</th>"; print "<th>Litre</th>"; print "<th>Tutar</th>"; print "</tr>"; while($rowAlinan=mysql_fetch_array($resultFis)) { $sqlFisTipi="SELECT * FROM atype WHERE a_id='".$rowAlinan['a_id']."'" ; $resultFisTipi=mysql_query($sqlFisTipi); $rowFisTipi=mysql_fetch_array($resultFisTipi); $sqlNerede="SELECT * FROM isyeri WHERE i_id='".$rowAlinan['nerde']."'" ; $resultNerede=mysql_query($sqlNerede); $rowNerede=mysql_fetch_array($resultNerede); $sqlMID="SELECT * FROM musteri WHERE m_id='".$rowAlinan['m_id']."'" ; $resultMID1=mysql_query($sqlMID); $rowMID1=mysql_fetch_array($resultMID1); print "<tr>"; print "<td><input name='checkBox[]' type='checkbox' value='".$rowAlinan['fis_id']."' /> php</td>"; print "<td>".$rowAlinan['fis_id']."</td>"; print "<td>".$rowMID1['m_name']."</td>"; print "<td>".$rowMID1['m_lastName']."</td>"; print "<td>".$rowAlinan['alinan_tarih']."</td>"; print "<td>".$rowFisTipi['a_name']."</td>"; print "<td>".$rowNerede['i_name']."</td>"; print "<td>".$rowAlinan['litre']."</td>"; print "<td>".$rowAlinan['tutar']."</td>"; print "</tr>"; } print '<div class="form_settings">'; print "<input class='submit' type='submit' name= 'send' value='Send'>"; / print '</div>'; print "</table>"; print "</form>"; }//end of if(num_rows>0) else echo '*no such receipt found!!'; mysql_close($con);

    Read the article

  • A free standing ASP.NET Pager Web Control

    - by Rick Strahl
    Paging in ASP.NET has been relatively easy with stock controls supporting basic paging functionality. However, recently I built an MVC application and one of the things I ran into was that I HAD TO build manual paging support into a few of my pages. Dealing with list controls and rendering markup is easy enough, but doing paging is a little more involved. I ended up with a small but flexible component that can be dropped anywhere. As it turns out the task of creating a semi-generic Pager control for MVC was fairly easily. Now I’m back to working in Web Forms and thought to myself that the way I created the pager in MVC actually would also work in ASP.NET – in fact quite a bit easier since the whole thing can be conveniently wrapped up into an easily reusable control. A standalone pager would provider easier reuse in various pages and a more consistent pager display regardless of what kind of 'control’ the pager is associated with. Why a Pager Control? At first blush it might sound silly to create a new pager control – after all Web Forms has pretty decent paging support, doesn’t it? Well, sort of. Yes the GridView control has automatic paging built in and the ListView control has the related DataPager control. The built in ASP.NET paging has several issues though: Postback and JavaScript requirements If you look at paging links in ASP.NET they are always postback links with javascript:__doPostback() calls that go back to the server. While that works fine and actually has some benefit like the fact that paging saves changes to the page and post them back, it’s not very SEO friendly. Basically if you use javascript based navigation nosearch engine will follow the paging links which effectively cuts off list content on the first page. The DataPager control does support GET based links via the QueryStringParameter property, but the control is effectively tied to the ListView control (which is the only control that implements IPageableItemContainer). DataSource Controls required for Efficient Data Paging Retrieval The only way you can get paging to work efficiently where only the few records you display on the page are queried for and retrieved from the database you have to use a DataSource control - only the Linq and Entity DataSource controls  support this natively. While you can retrieve this data yourself manually, there’s no way to just assign the page number and render the pager based on this custom subset. Other than that default paging requires a full resultset for ASP.NET to filter the data and display only a subset which can be very resource intensive and wasteful if you’re dealing with largish resultsets (although I’m a firm believer in returning actually usable sets :-}). If you use your own business layer that doesn’t fit an ObjectDataSource you’re SOL. That’s a real shame too because with LINQ based querying it’s real easy to retrieve a subset of data that is just the data you want to display but the native Pager functionality doesn’t support just setting properties to display just the subset AFAIK. DataPager is not Free Standing The DataPager control is the closest thing to a decent Pager implementation that ASP.NET has, but alas it’s not a free standing component – it works off a related control and the only one that it effectively supports from the stock ASP.NET controls is the ListView control. This means you can’t use the same data pager formatting for a grid and a list view or vice versa and you’re always tied to the control. Paging Events In order to handle paging you have to deal with paging events. The events fire at specific time instances in the page pipeline and because of this you often have to handle data binding in a way to work around the paging events or else end up double binding your data sources based on paging. Yuk. Styling The GridView pager is a royal pain to beat into submission for styled rendering. The DataPager control has many more options and template layout and it renders somewhat cleaner, but it too is not exactly easy to get a decent display for. Not a Generic Solution The problem with the ASP.NET controls too is that it’s not generic. GridView, DataGrid use their own internal paging, ListView can use a DataPager and if you want to manually create data layout – well you’re on your own. IOW, depending on what you use you likely have very different looking Paging experiences. So, I figured I’ve struggled with this once too many and finally sat down and built a Pager control. The Pager Control My goal was to create a totally free standing control that has no dependencies on other controls and certainly no requirements for using DataSource controls. The idea is that you should be able to use this pager control without any sort of data requirements at all – you should just be able to set properties and be able to display a pager. The Pager control I ended up with has the following features: Completely free standing Pager control – no control or data dependencies Complete manual control – Pager can render without any data dependency Easy to use: Only need to set PageSize, ActivePage and TotalItems Supports optional filtering of IQueryable for efficient queries and Pager rendering Supports optional full set filtering of IEnumerable<T> and DataTable Page links are plain HTTP GET href Links Control automatically picks up Page links on the URL and assigns them (automatic page detection no page index changing events to hookup) Full CSS Styling support On the downside there’s no templating support for the control so the layout of the pager is relatively fixed. All elements however are stylable and there are options to control the text, and layout options such as whether to display first and last pages and the previous/next buttons and so on. To give you an idea what the pager looks like, here are two differently styled examples (all via CSS):   The markup for these two pagers looks like this: <ww:Pager runat="server" id="ItemPager" PageSize="5" PageLinkCssClass="gridpagerbutton" SelectedPageCssClass="gridpagerbutton-selected" PagesTextCssClass="gridpagertext" CssClass="gridpager" RenderContainerDiv="true" ContainerDivCssClass="gridpagercontainer" MaxPagesToDisplay="6" PagesText="Item Pages:" NextText="next" PreviousText="previous" /> <ww:Pager runat="server" id="ItemPager2" PageSize="5" RenderContainerDiv="true" MaxPagesToDisplay="6" /> The latter example uses default style settings so it there’s not much to set. The first example on the other hand explicitly assigns custom styles and overrides a few of the formatting options. Styling The styling is based on a number of CSS classes of which the the main pager, pagerbutton and pagerbutton-selected classes are the important ones. Other styles like pagerbutton-next/prev/first/last are based on the pagerbutton style. The default styling shown for the red outlined pager looks like this: .pagercontainer { margin: 20px 0; background: whitesmoke; padding: 5px; } .pager { float: right; font-size: 10pt; text-align: left; } .pagerbutton,.pagerbutton-selected,.pagertext { display: block; float: left; text-align: center; border: solid 2px maroon; min-width: 18px; margin-left: 3px; text-decoration: none; padding: 4px; } .pagerbutton-selected { font-size: 130%; font-weight: bold; color: maroon; border-width: 0px; background: khaki; } .pagerbutton-first { margin-right: 12px; } .pagerbutton-last,.pagerbutton-prev { margin-left: 12px; } .pagertext { border: none; margin-left: 30px; font-weight: bold; } .pagerbutton a { text-decoration: none; } .pagerbutton:hover { background-color: maroon; color: cornsilk; } .pagerbutton-prev { background-image: url(images/prev.png); background-position: 2px center; background-repeat: no-repeat; width: 35px; padding-left: 20px; } .pagerbutton-next { background-image: url(images/next.png); background-position: 40px center; background-repeat: no-repeat; width: 35px; padding-right: 20px; margin-right: 0px; } Yup that’s a lot of styling settings although not all of them are required. The key ones are pagerbutton, pager and pager selection. The others (which are implicitly created by the control based on the pagerbutton style) are for custom markup of the ‘special’ buttons. In my apps I tend to have two kinds of pages: Those that are associated with typical ‘grid’ displays that display purely tabular data and those that have a more looser list like layout. The two pagers shown above represent these two views and the pager and gridpager styles in my standard style sheet reflect these two styles. Configuring the Pager with Code Finally lets look at what it takes to hook up the pager. As mentioned in the highlights the Pager control is completely independent of other controls so if you just want to display a pager on its own it’s as simple as dropping the control and assigning the PageSize, ActivePage and either TotalPages or TotalItems. So for this markup: <ww:Pager runat="server" id="ItemPagerManual" PageSize="5" MaxPagesToDisplay="6" /> I can use code as simple as: ItemPagerManual.PageSize = 3; ItemPagerManual.ActivePage = 4;ItemPagerManual.TotalItems = 20; Note that ActivePage is not required - it will automatically use any Page=x query string value and assign it, although you can override it as I did above. TotalItems can be any value that you retrieve from a result set or manually assign as I did above. A more realistic scenario based on a LINQ to SQL IQueryable result is even easier. In this example, I have a UserControl that contains a ListView control that renders IQueryable data. I use a User Control here because there are different views the user can choose from with each view being a different user control. This incidentally also highlights one of the nice features of the pager: Because the pager is independent of the control I can put the pager on the host page instead of into each of the user controls. IOW, there’s only one Pager control, but there are potentially many user controls/listviews that hold the actual display data. The following code demonstrates how to use the Pager with an IQueryable that loads only the records it displays: protected voidPage_Load(objectsender, EventArgs e) {     Category = Request.Params["Category"] ?? string.Empty;     IQueryable<wws_Item> ItemList = ItemRepository.GetItemsByCategory(Category);     // Update the page and filter the list down     ItemList = ItemPager.FilterIQueryable<wws_Item>(ItemList); // Render user control with a list view Control ulItemList = LoadControl("~/usercontrols/" + App.Configuration.ItemListType + ".ascx"); ((IInventoryItemListControl)ulItemList).InventoryItemList = ItemList; phItemList.Controls.Add(ulItemList); // placeholder } The code uses a business object to retrieve Items by category as an IQueryable which means that the result is only an expression tree that hasn’t execute SQL yet and can be further filtered. I then pass this IQueryable to the FilterIQueryable() helper method of the control which does two main things: Filters the IQueryable to retrieve only the data displayed on the active page Sets the Totaltems property and calculates TotalPages on the Pager and that’s it! When the Pager renders it uses those values, plus the PageSize and ActivePage properties to render the Pager. In addition to IQueryable there are also filter methods for IEnumerable<T> and DataTable, but these versions just filter the data by removing rows/items from the entire already retrieved data. Output Generated and Paging Links The output generated creates pager links as plain href links. Here’s what the output looks like: <div id="ItemPager" class="pagercontainer"> <div class="pager"> <span class="pagertext">Pages: </span><a href="http://localhost/WestWindWebStore/itemlist.aspx?Page=1" class="pagerbutton" />1</a> <a href="http://localhost/WestWindWebStore/itemlist.aspx?Page=2" class="pagerbutton" />2</a> <a href="http://localhost/WestWindWebStore/itemlist.aspx?Page=3" class="pagerbutton" />3</a> <span class="pagerbutton-selected">4</span> <a href="http://localhost/WestWindWebStore/itemlist.aspx?Page=5" class="pagerbutton" />5</a> <a href="http://localhost/WestWindWebStore/itemlist.aspx?Page=6" class="pagerbutton" />6</a> <a href="http://localhost/WestWindWebStore/itemlist.aspx?Page=20" class="pagerbutton pagerbutton-last" />20</a>&nbsp;<a href="http://localhost/WestWindWebStore/itemlist.aspx?Page=3" class="pagerbutton pagerbutton-prev" />Prev</a>&nbsp;<a href="http://localhost/WestWindWebStore/itemlist.aspx?Page=5" class="pagerbutton pagerbutton-next" />Next</a></div> <br clear="all" /> </div> </div> The links point back to the current page and simply append a Page= page link into the page. When the page gets reloaded with the new page number the pager automatically detects the page number and automatically assigns the ActivePage property which results in the appropriate page to be displayed. The code shown in the previous section is all that’s needed to handle paging. Note that HTTP GET based paging is different than the Postback paging ASP.NET uses by default. Postback paging preserves modified page content when clicking on pager buttons, but this control will simply load a new page – no page preservation at this time. The advantage of not using Postback paging is that the URLs generated are plain HTML links that a search engine can follow where __doPostback() links are not. Pager with a Grid The pager also works in combination with grid controls so it’s easy to bypass the grid control’s paging features if desired. In the following example I use a gridView control and binds it to a DataTable result which is also filterable by the Pager control. The very basic plain vanilla ASP.NET grid markup looks like this: <div style="width: 600px; margin: 0 auto;padding: 20px; "> <asp:DataGrid runat="server" AutoGenerateColumns="True" ID="gdItems" CssClass="blackborder" style="width: 600px;"> <AlternatingItemStyle CssClass="gridalternate" /> <HeaderStyle CssClass="gridheader" /> </asp:DataGrid> <ww:Pager runat="server" ID="Pager" CssClass="gridpager" ContainerDivCssClass="gridpagercontainer" PageLinkCssClass="gridpagerbutton" SelectedPageCssClass="gridpagerbutton-selected" PageSize="8" RenderContainerDiv="true" MaxPagesToDisplay="6" /> </div> and looks like this when rendered: using custom set of CSS styles. The code behind for this code is also very simple: protected void Page_Load(object sender, EventArgs e) { string category = Request.Params["category"] ?? ""; busItem itemRep = WebStoreFactory.GetItem(); var items = itemRep.GetItemsByCategory(category) .Select(itm => new {Sku = itm.Sku, Description = itm.Description}); // run query into a DataTable for demonstration DataTable dt = itemRep.Converter.ToDataTable(items,"TItems"); // Remove all items not on the current page dt = Pager.FilterDataTable(dt,0); // bind and display gdItems.DataSource = dt; gdItems.DataBind(); } A little contrived I suppose since the list could already be bound from the list of elements, but this is to demonstrate that you can also bind against a DataTable if your business layer returns those. Unfortunately there’s no way to filter a DataReader as it’s a one way forward only reader and the reader is required by the DataSource to perform the bindings.  However, you can still use a DataReader as long as your business logic filters the data prior to rendering and provides a total item count (most likely as a second query). Control Creation The control itself is a pretty brute force ASP.NET control. Nothing clever about this other than some basic rendering logic and some simple calculations and update routines to determine which buttons need to be shown. You can take a look at the full code from the West Wind Web Toolkit’s Repository (note there are a few dependencies). To give you an idea how the control works here is the Render() method: /// <summary> /// overridden to handle custom pager rendering for runtime and design time /// </summary> /// <param name="writer"></param> protected override void Render(HtmlTextWriter writer) { base.Render(writer); if (TotalPages == 0 && TotalItems > 0) TotalPages = CalculateTotalPagesFromTotalItems(); if (DesignMode) TotalPages = 10; // don't render pager if there's only one page if (TotalPages < 2) return; if (RenderContainerDiv) { if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(ContainerDivCssClass)) writer.AddAttribute("class", ContainerDivCssClass); writer.RenderBeginTag("div"); } // main pager wrapper writer.WriteBeginTag("div"); writer.AddAttribute("id", this.ClientID); if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(CssClass)) writer.WriteAttribute("class", this.CssClass); writer.Write(HtmlTextWriter.TagRightChar + "\r\n"); // Pages Text writer.WriteBeginTag("span"); if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(PagesTextCssClass)) writer.WriteAttribute("class", PagesTextCssClass); writer.Write(HtmlTextWriter.TagRightChar); writer.Write(this.PagesText); writer.WriteEndTag("span"); // if the base url is empty use the current URL FixupBaseUrl(); // set _startPage and _endPage ConfigurePagesToRender(); // write out first page link if (ShowFirstAndLastPageLinks && _startPage != 1) { writer.WriteBeginTag("a"); string pageUrl = StringUtils.SetUrlEncodedKey(BaseUrl, QueryStringPageField, (1).ToString()); writer.WriteAttribute("href", pageUrl); if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(PageLinkCssClass)) writer.WriteAttribute("class", PageLinkCssClass + " " + PageLinkCssClass + "-first"); writer.Write(HtmlTextWriter.SelfClosingTagEnd); writer.Write("1"); writer.WriteEndTag("a"); writer.Write("&nbsp;"); } // write out all the page links for (int i = _startPage; i < _endPage + 1; i++) { if (i == ActivePage) { writer.WriteBeginTag("span"); if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(SelectedPageCssClass)) writer.WriteAttribute("class", SelectedPageCssClass); writer.Write(HtmlTextWriter.TagRightChar); writer.Write(i.ToString()); writer.WriteEndTag("span"); } else { writer.WriteBeginTag("a"); string pageUrl = StringUtils.SetUrlEncodedKey(BaseUrl, QueryStringPageField, i.ToString()).TrimEnd('&'); writer.WriteAttribute("href", pageUrl); if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(PageLinkCssClass)) writer.WriteAttribute("class", PageLinkCssClass); writer.Write(HtmlTextWriter.SelfClosingTagEnd); writer.Write(i.ToString()); writer.WriteEndTag("a"); } writer.Write("\r\n"); } // write out last page link if (ShowFirstAndLastPageLinks && _endPage < TotalPages) { writer.WriteBeginTag("a"); string pageUrl = StringUtils.SetUrlEncodedKey(BaseUrl, QueryStringPageField, TotalPages.ToString()); writer.WriteAttribute("href", pageUrl); if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(PageLinkCssClass)) writer.WriteAttribute("class", PageLinkCssClass + " " + PageLinkCssClass + "-last"); writer.Write(HtmlTextWriter.SelfClosingTagEnd); writer.Write(TotalPages.ToString()); writer.WriteEndTag("a"); } // Previous link if (ShowPreviousNextLinks && !string.IsNullOrEmpty(PreviousText) && ActivePage > 1) { writer.Write("&nbsp;"); writer.WriteBeginTag("a"); string pageUrl = StringUtils.SetUrlEncodedKey(BaseUrl, QueryStringPageField, (ActivePage - 1).ToString()); writer.WriteAttribute("href", pageUrl); if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(PageLinkCssClass)) writer.WriteAttribute("class", PageLinkCssClass + " " + PageLinkCssClass + "-prev"); writer.Write(HtmlTextWriter.SelfClosingTagEnd); writer.Write(PreviousText); writer.WriteEndTag("a"); } // Next link if (ShowPreviousNextLinks && !string.IsNullOrEmpty(NextText) && ActivePage < TotalPages) { writer.Write("&nbsp;"); writer.WriteBeginTag("a"); string pageUrl = StringUtils.SetUrlEncodedKey(BaseUrl, QueryStringPageField, (ActivePage + 1).ToString()); writer.WriteAttribute("href", pageUrl); if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(PageLinkCssClass)) writer.WriteAttribute("class", PageLinkCssClass + " " + PageLinkCssClass + "-next"); writer.Write(HtmlTextWriter.SelfClosingTagEnd); writer.Write(NextText); writer.WriteEndTag("a"); } writer.WriteEndTag("div"); if (RenderContainerDiv) { if (RenderContainerDivBreak) writer.Write("<br clear=\"all\" />\r\n"); writer.WriteEndTag("div"); } } As I said pretty much brute force rendering based on the control’s property settings of which there are quite a few: You can also see the pager in the designer above. unfortunately the VS designer (both 2010 and 2008) fails to render the float: left CSS styles properly and starts wrapping after margins are applied in the special buttons. Not a big deal since VS does at least respect the spacing (the floated elements overlay). Then again I’m not using the designer anyway :-}. Filtering Data What makes the Pager easy to use is the filter methods built into the control. While this functionality is clearly not the most politically correct design choice as it violates separation of concerns, it’s very useful for typical pager operation. While I actually have filter methods that do something similar in my business layer, having it exposed on the control makes the control a lot more useful for typical databinding scenarios. Of course these methods are optional – if you have a business layer that can provide filtered page queries for you can use that instead and assign the TotalItems property manually. There are three filter method types available for IQueryable, IEnumerable and for DataTable which tend to be the most common use cases in my apps old and new. The IQueryable version is pretty simple as it can simply rely on on .Skip() and .Take() with LINQ: /// <summary> /// <summary> /// Queries the database for the ActivePage applied manually /// or from the Request["page"] variable. This routine /// figures out and sets TotalPages, ActivePage and /// returns a filtered subset IQueryable that contains /// only the items from the ActivePage. /// </summary> /// <param name="query"></param> /// <param name="activePage"> /// The page you want to display. Sets the ActivePage property when passed. /// Pass 0 or smaller to use ActivePage setting. /// </param> /// <returns></returns> public IQueryable<T> FilterIQueryable<T>(IQueryable<T> query, int activePage) where T : class, new() { ActivePage = activePage < 1 ? ActivePage : activePage; if (ActivePage < 1) ActivePage = 1; TotalItems = query.Count(); if (TotalItems <= PageSize) { ActivePage = 1; TotalPages = 1; return query; } int skip = ActivePage - 1; if (skip > 0) query = query.Skip(skip * PageSize); _TotalPages = CalculateTotalPagesFromTotalItems(); return query.Take(PageSize); } The IEnumerable<T> version simply  converts the IEnumerable to an IQuerable and calls back into this method for filtering. The DataTable version requires a little more work to manually parse and filter records (I didn’t want to add the Linq DataSetExtensions assembly just for this): /// <summary> /// Filters a data table for an ActivePage. /// /// Note: Modifies the data set permanently by remove DataRows /// </summary> /// <param name="dt">Full result DataTable</param> /// <param name="activePage">Page to display. 0 to use ActivePage property </param> /// <returns></returns> public DataTable FilterDataTable(DataTable dt, int activePage) { ActivePage = activePage < 1 ? ActivePage : activePage; if (ActivePage < 1) ActivePage = 1; TotalItems = dt.Rows.Count; if (TotalItems <= PageSize) { ActivePage = 1; TotalPages = 1; return dt; } int skip = ActivePage - 1; if (skip > 0) { for (int i = 0; i < skip * PageSize; i++ ) dt.Rows.RemoveAt(0); } while(dt.Rows.Count > PageSize) dt.Rows.RemoveAt(PageSize); return dt; } Using the Pager Control The pager as it is is a first cut I built a couple of weeks ago and since then have been tweaking a little as part of an internal project I’m working on. I’ve replaced a bunch of pagers on various older pages with this pager without any issues and have what now feels like a more consistent user interface where paging looks and feels the same across different controls. As a bonus I’m only loading the data from the database that I need to display a single page. With the preset class tags applied too adding a pager is now as easy as dropping the control and adding the style sheet for styling to be consistent – no fuss, no muss. Schweet. Hopefully some of you may find this as useful as I have or at least as a baseline to build ontop of… Resources The Pager is part of the West Wind Web & Ajax Toolkit Pager.cs Source Code (some toolkit dependencies) Westwind.css base stylesheet with .pager and .gridpager styles Pager Example Page © Rick Strahl, West Wind Technologies, 2005-2010Posted in ASP.NET  

    Read the article

  • Using FiddlerCore to capture HTTP Requests with .NET

    - by Rick Strahl
    Over the last few weeks I’ve been working on my Web load testing utility West Wind WebSurge. One of the key components of a load testing tool is the ability to capture URLs effectively so that you can play them back later under load. One of the options in WebSurge for capturing URLs is to use its built-in capture tool which acts as an HTTP proxy to capture any HTTP and HTTPS traffic from most Windows HTTP clients, including Web Browsers as well as standalone Windows applications and services. To make this happen, I used Eric Lawrence’s awesome FiddlerCore library, which provides most of the functionality of his desktop Fiddler application, all rolled into an easy to use library that you can plug into your own applications. FiddlerCore makes it almost too easy to capture HTTP content! For WebSurge I needed to capture all HTTP traffic in order to capture the full HTTP request – URL, headers and any content posted by the client. The result of what I ended up creating is this semi-generic capture form: In this post I’m going to demonstrate how easy it is to use FiddlerCore to build this HTTP Capture Form.  If you want to jump right in here are the links to get Telerik’s Fiddler Core and the code for the demo provided here. FiddlerCore Download FiddlerCore on NuGet Show me the Code (WebSurge Integration code from GitHub) Download the WinForms Sample Form West Wind Web Surge (example implementation in live app) Note that FiddlerCore is bound by a license for commercial usage – see license.txt in the FiddlerCore distribution for details. Integrating FiddlerCore FiddlerCore is a library that simply plugs into your application. You can download it from the Telerik site and manually add the assemblies to your project, or you can simply install the NuGet package via:       PM> Install-Package FiddlerCore The library consists of the FiddlerCore.dll as well as a couple of support libraries (CertMaker.dll and BCMakeCert.dll) that are used for installing SSL certificates. I’ll have more on SSL captures and certificate installation later in this post. But first let’s see how easy it is to use FiddlerCore to capture HTTP content by looking at how to build the above capture form. Capturing HTTP Content Once the library is installed it’s super easy to hook up Fiddler functionality. Fiddler includes a number of static class methods on the FiddlerApplication object that can be called to hook up callback events as well as actual start monitoring HTTP URLs. In the following code directly lifted from WebSurge, I configure a few filter options on Form level object, from the user inputs shown on the form by assigning it to a capture options object. In the live application these settings are persisted configuration values, but in the demo they are one time values initialized and set on the form. Once these options are set, I hook up the AfterSessionComplete event to capture every URL that passes through the proxy after the request is completed and start up the Proxy service:void Start() { if (tbIgnoreResources.Checked) CaptureConfiguration.IgnoreResources = true; else CaptureConfiguration.IgnoreResources = false; string strProcId = txtProcessId.Text; if (strProcId.Contains('-')) strProcId = strProcId.Substring(strProcId.IndexOf('-') + 1).Trim(); strProcId = strProcId.Trim(); int procId = 0; if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(strProcId)) { if (!int.TryParse(strProcId, out procId)) procId = 0; } CaptureConfiguration.ProcessId = procId; CaptureConfiguration.CaptureDomain = txtCaptureDomain.Text; FiddlerApplication.AfterSessionComplete += FiddlerApplication_AfterSessionComplete; FiddlerApplication.Startup(8888, true, true, true); } The key lines for FiddlerCore are just the last two lines of code that include the event hookup code as well as the Startup() method call. Here I only hook up to the AfterSessionComplete event but there are a number of other events that hook various stages of the HTTP request cycle you can also hook into. Other events include BeforeRequest, BeforeResponse, RequestHeadersAvailable, ResponseHeadersAvailable and so on. In my case I want to capture the request data and I actually have several options to capture this data. AfterSessionComplete is the last event that fires in the request sequence and it’s the most common choice to capture all request and response data. I could have used several other events, but AfterSessionComplete is one place where you can look both at the request and response data, so this will be the most common place to hook into if you’re capturing content. The implementation of AfterSessionComplete is responsible for capturing all HTTP request headers and it looks something like this:private void FiddlerApplication_AfterSessionComplete(Session sess) { // Ignore HTTPS connect requests if (sess.RequestMethod == "CONNECT") return; if (CaptureConfiguration.ProcessId > 0) { if (sess.LocalProcessID != 0 && sess.LocalProcessID != CaptureConfiguration.ProcessId) return; } if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(CaptureConfiguration.CaptureDomain)) { if (sess.hostname.ToLower() != CaptureConfiguration.CaptureDomain.Trim().ToLower()) return; } if (CaptureConfiguration.IgnoreResources) { string url = sess.fullUrl.ToLower(); var extensions = CaptureConfiguration.ExtensionFilterExclusions; foreach (var ext in extensions) { if (url.Contains(ext)) return; } var filters = CaptureConfiguration.UrlFilterExclusions; foreach (var urlFilter in filters) { if (url.Contains(urlFilter)) return; } } if (sess == null || sess.oRequest == null || sess.oRequest.headers == null) return; string headers = sess.oRequest.headers.ToString(); var reqBody = sess.GetRequestBodyAsString(); // if you wanted to capture the response //string respHeaders = session.oResponse.headers.ToString(); //var respBody = session.GetResponseBodyAsString(); // replace the HTTP line to inject full URL string firstLine = sess.RequestMethod + " " + sess.fullUrl + " " + sess.oRequest.headers.HTTPVersion; int at = headers.IndexOf("\r\n"); if (at < 0) return; headers = firstLine + "\r\n" + headers.Substring(at + 1); string output = headers + "\r\n" + (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(reqBody) ? reqBody + "\r\n" : string.Empty) + Separator + "\r\n\r\n"; BeginInvoke(new Action<string>((text) => { txtCapture.AppendText(text); UpdateButtonStatus(); }), output); } The code starts by filtering out some requests based on the CaptureOptions I set before the capture is started. These options/filters are applied when requests actually come in. This is very useful to help narrow down the requests that are captured for playback based on options the user picked. I find it useful to limit requests to a certain domain for captures, as well as filtering out some request types like static resources – images, css, scripts etc. This is of course optional, but I think it’s a common scenario and WebSurge makes good use of this feature. AfterSessionComplete like other FiddlerCore events, provides a Session object parameter which contains all the request and response details. There are oRequest and oResponse objects to hold their respective data. In my case I’m interested in the raw request headers and body only, as you can see in the commented code you can also retrieve the response headers and body. Here the code captures the request headers and body and simply appends the output to the textbox on the screen. Note that the Fiddler events are asynchronous, so in order to display the content in the UI they have to be marshaled back the UI thread with BeginInvoke, which here simply takes the generated headers and appends it to the existing textbox test on the form. As each request is processed, the headers are captured and appended to the bottom of the textbox resulting in a Session HTTP capture in the format that Web Surge internally supports, which is basically raw request headers with a customized 1st HTTP Header line that includes the full URL rather than a server relative URL. When the capture is done the user can either copy the raw HTTP session to the clipboard, or directly save it to file. This raw capture format is the same format WebSurge and also Fiddler use to import/export request data. While this code is application specific, it demonstrates the kind of logic that you can easily apply to the request capture process, which is one of the reasonsof why FiddlerCore is so powerful. You get to choose what content you want to look up as part of your own application logic and you can then decide how to capture or use that data as part of your application. The actual captured data in this case is only a string. The user can edit the data by hand or in the the case of WebSurge, save it to disk and automatically open the captured session as a new load test. Stopping the FiddlerCore Proxy Finally to stop capturing requests you simply disconnect the event handler and call the FiddlerApplication.ShutDown() method:void Stop() { FiddlerApplication.AfterSessionComplete -= FiddlerApplication_AfterSessionComplete; if (FiddlerApplication.IsStarted()) FiddlerApplication.Shutdown(); } As you can see, adding HTTP capture functionality to an application is very straight forward. FiddlerCore offers tons of features I’m not even touching on here – I suspect basic captures are the most common scenario, but a lot of different things can be done with FiddlerCore’s simple API interface. Sky’s the limit! The source code for this sample capture form (WinForms) is provided as part of this article. Adding Fiddler Certificates with FiddlerCore One of the sticking points in West Wind WebSurge has been that if you wanted to capture HTTPS/SSL traffic, you needed to have the full version of Fiddler and have HTTPS decryption enabled. Essentially you had to use Fiddler to configure HTTPS decryption and the associated installation of the Fiddler local client certificate that is used for local decryption of incoming SSL traffic. While this works just fine, requiring to have Fiddler installed and then using a separate application to configure the SSL functionality isn’t ideal. Fortunately FiddlerCore actually includes the tools to register the Fiddler Certificate directly using FiddlerCore. Why does Fiddler need a Certificate in the first Place? Fiddler and FiddlerCore are essentially HTTP proxies which means they inject themselves into the HTTP conversation by re-routing HTTP traffic to a special HTTP port (8888 by default for Fiddler) and then forward the HTTP data to the original client. Fiddler injects itself as the system proxy in using the WinInet Windows settings  which are the same settings that Internet Explorer uses and that are configured in the Windows and Internet Explorer Internet Settings dialog. Most HTTP clients running on Windows pick up and apply these system level Proxy settings before establishing new HTTP connections and that’s why most clients automatically work once Fiddler – or FiddlerCore/WebSurge are running. For plain HTTP requests this just works – Fiddler intercepts the HTTP requests on the proxy port and then forwards them to the original port (80 for HTTP and 443 for SSL typically but it could be any port). For SSL however, this is not quite as simple – Fiddler can easily act as an HTTPS/SSL client to capture inbound requests from the server, but when it forwards the request to the client it has to also act as an SSL server and provide a certificate that the client trusts. This won’t be the original certificate from the remote site, but rather a custom local certificate that effectively simulates an SSL connection between the proxy and the client. If there is no custom certificate configured for Fiddler the SSL request fails with a certificate validation error. The key for this to work is that a custom certificate has to be installed that the HTTPS client trusts on the local machine. For a much more detailed description of the process you can check out Eric Lawrence’s blog post on Certificates. If you’re using the desktop version of Fiddler you can install a local certificate into the Windows certificate store. Fiddler proper does this from the Options menu: This operation does several things: It installs the Fiddler Root Certificate It sets trust to this Root Certificate A new client certificate is generated for each HTTPS site monitored Certificate Installation with FiddlerCore You can also provide this same functionality using FiddlerCore which includes a CertMaker class. Using CertMaker is straight forward to use and it provides an easy way to create some simple helpers that can install and uninstall a Fiddler Root certificate:public static bool InstallCertificate() { if (!CertMaker.rootCertExists()) { if (!CertMaker.createRootCert()) return false; if (!CertMaker.trustRootCert()) return false; } return true; } public static bool UninstallCertificate() { if (CertMaker.rootCertExists()) { if (!CertMaker.removeFiddlerGeneratedCerts(true)) return false; } return true; } InstallCertificate() works by first checking whether the root certificate is already installed and if it isn’t goes ahead and creates a new one. The process of creating the certificate is a two step process – first the actual certificate is created and then it’s moved into the certificate store to become trusted. I’m not sure why you’d ever split these operations up since a cert created without trust isn’t going to be of much value, but there are two distinct steps. When you trigger the trustRootCert() method, a message box will pop up on the desktop that lets you know that you’re about to trust a local private certificate. This is a security feature to ensure that you really want to trust the Fiddler root since you are essentially installing a man in the middle certificate. It’s quite safe to use this generated root certificate, because it’s been specifically generated for your machine and thus is not usable from external sources, the only way to use this certificate in a trusted way is from the local machine. IOW, unless somebody has physical access to your machine, there’s no useful way to hijack this certificate and use it for nefarious purposes (see Eric’s post for more details). Once the Root certificate has been installed, FiddlerCore/Fiddler create new certificates for each site that is connected to with HTTPS. You can end up with quite a few temporary certificates in your certificate store. To uninstall you can either use Fiddler and simply uncheck the Decrypt HTTPS traffic option followed by the remove Fiddler certificates button, or you can use FiddlerCore’s CertMaker.removeFiddlerGeneratedCerts() which removes the root cert and any of the intermediary certificates Fiddler created. Keep in mind that when you uninstall you uninstall the certificate for both FiddlerCore and Fiddler, so use UninstallCertificate() with care and realize that you might affect the Fiddler application’s operation by doing so as well. When to check for an installed Certificate Note that the check to see if the root certificate exists is pretty fast, while the actual process of installing the certificate is a relatively slow operation that even on a fast machine takes a few seconds. Further the trust operation pops up a message box so you probably don’t want to install the certificate repeatedly. Since the check for the root certificate is fast, you can easily put a call to InstallCertificate() in any capture startup code – in which case the certificate installation only triggers when a certificate is in fact not installed. Personally I like to make certificate installation explicit – just like Fiddler does, so in WebSurge I use a small drop down option on the menu to install or uninstall the SSL certificate:   This code calls the InstallCertificate and UnInstallCertificate functions respectively – the experience with this is similar to what you get in Fiddler with the extra dialog box popping up to prompt confirmation for installation of the root certificate. Once the cert is installed you can then capture SSL requests. There’s a gotcha however… Gotcha: FiddlerCore Certificates don’t stick by Default When I originally tried to use the Fiddler certificate installation I ran into an odd problem. I was able to install the certificate and immediately after installation was able to capture HTTPS requests. Then I would exit the application and come back in and try the same HTTPS capture again and it would fail due to a missing certificate. CertMaker.rootCertExists() would return false after every restart and if re-installed the certificate a new certificate would get added to the certificate store resulting in a bunch of duplicated root certificates with different keys. What the heck? CertMaker and BcMakeCert create non-sticky CertificatesI turns out that FiddlerCore by default uses different components from what the full version of Fiddler uses. Fiddler uses a Windows utility called MakeCert.exe to create the Fiddler Root certificate. FiddlerCore however installs the CertMaker.dll and BCMakeCert.dll assemblies, which use a different crypto library (Bouncy Castle) for certificate creation than MakeCert.exe which uses the Windows Crypto API. The assemblies provide support for non-windows operation for Fiddler under Mono, as well as support for some non-Windows certificate platforms like iOS and Android for decryption. The bottom line is that the FiddlerCore provided bouncy castle assemblies are not sticky by default as the certificates created with them are not cached as they are in Fiddler proper. To get certificates to ‘stick’ you have to explicitly cache the certificates in Fiddler’s internal preferences. A cache aware version of InstallCertificate looks something like this:public static bool InstallCertificate() { if (!CertMaker.rootCertExists()) { if (!CertMaker.createRootCert()) return false; if (!CertMaker.trustRootCert()) return false; App.Configuration.UrlCapture.Cert = FiddlerApplication.Prefs.GetStringPref("fiddler.certmaker.bc.cert", null); App.Configuration.UrlCapture.Key = FiddlerApplication.Prefs.GetStringPref("fiddler.certmaker.bc.key", null); } return true; } public static bool UninstallCertificate() { if (CertMaker.rootCertExists()) { if (!CertMaker.removeFiddlerGeneratedCerts(true)) return false; } App.Configuration.UrlCapture.Cert = null; App.Configuration.UrlCapture.Key = null; return true; } In this code I store the Fiddler cert and private key in an application configuration settings that’s stored with the application settings (App.Configuration.UrlCapture object). These settings automatically persist when WebSurge is shut down. The values are read out of Fiddler’s internal preferences store which is set after a new certificate has been created. Likewise I clear out the configuration settings when the certificate is uninstalled. In order for these setting to be used you have to also load the configuration settings into the Fiddler preferences *before* a call to rootCertExists() is made. I do this in the capture form’s constructor:public FiddlerCapture(StressTestForm form) { InitializeComponent(); CaptureConfiguration = App.Configuration.UrlCapture; MainForm = form; if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(App.Configuration.UrlCapture.Cert)) { FiddlerApplication.Prefs.SetStringPref("fiddler.certmaker.bc.key", App.Configuration.UrlCapture.Key); FiddlerApplication.Prefs.SetStringPref("fiddler.certmaker.bc.cert", App.Configuration.UrlCapture.Cert); }} This is kind of a drag to do and not documented anywhere that I could find, so hopefully this will save you some grief if you want to work with the stock certificate logic that installs with FiddlerCore. MakeCert provides sticky Certificates and the same functionality as Fiddler But there’s actually an easier way. If you want to skip the above Fiddler preference configuration code in your application you can choose to distribute MakeCert.exe instead of certmaker.dll and bcmakecert.dll. When you use MakeCert.exe, the certificates settings are stored in Windows so they are available without any custom configuration inside of your application. It’s easier to integrate and as long as you run on Windows and you don’t need to support iOS or Android devices is simply easier to deal with. To integrate into your project, you can remove the reference to CertMaker.dll (and the BcMakeCert.dll assembly) from your project. Instead copy MakeCert.exe into your output folder. To make sure MakeCert.exe gets pushed out, include MakeCert.exe in your project and set the Build Action to None, and Copy to Output Directory to Copy if newer. Note that the CertMaker.dll reference in the project has been removed and on disk the files for Certmaker.dll, as well as the BCMakeCert.dll files on disk. Keep in mind that these DLLs are resources of the FiddlerCore NuGet package, so updating the package may end up pushing those files back into your project. Once MakeCert.exe is distributed FiddlerCore checks for it first before using the assemblies so as long as MakeCert.exe exists it’ll be used for certificate creation (at least on Windows). Summary FiddlerCore is a pretty sweet tool, and it’s absolutely awesome that we get to plug in most of the functionality of Fiddler right into our own applications. A few years back I tried to build this sort of functionality myself for an app and ended up giving up because it’s a big job to get HTTP right – especially if you need to support SSL. FiddlerCore now provides that functionality as a turnkey solution that can be plugged into your own apps easily. The only downside is FiddlerCore’s documentation for more advanced features like certificate installation which is pretty sketchy. While for the most part FiddlerCore’s feature set is easy to work with without any documentation, advanced features are often not intuitive to gleam by just using Intellisense or the FiddlerCore help file reference (which is not terribly useful). While Eric Lawrence is very responsive on his forum and on Twitter, there simply isn’t much useful documentation on Fiddler/FiddlerCore available online. If you run into trouble the forum is probably the first place to look and then ask a question if you can’t find the answer. The best documentation you can find is Eric’s Fiddler Book which covers a ton of functionality of Fiddler and FiddlerCore. The book is a great reference to Fiddler’s feature set as well as providing great insights into the HTTP protocol. The second half of the book that gets into the innards of HTTP is an excellent read for anybody who wants to know more about some of the more arcane aspects and special behaviors of HTTP – it’s well worth the read. While the book has tons of information in a very readable format, it’s unfortunately not a great reference as it’s hard to find things in the book and because it’s not available online you can’t electronically search for the great content in it. But it’s hard to complain about any of this given the obvious effort and love that’s gone into this awesome product for all of these years. A mighty big thanks to Eric Lawrence  for having created this useful tool that so many of us use all the time, and also to Telerik for picking up Fiddler/FiddlerCore and providing Eric the resources to support and improve this wonderful tool full time and keeping it free for all. Kudos! Resources FiddlerCore Download FiddlerCore NuGet Fiddler Capture Sample Form Fiddler Capture Form in West Wind WebSurge (GitHub) Eric Lawrence’s Fiddler Book© Rick Strahl, West Wind Technologies, 2005-2014Posted in .NET  HTTP   Tweet !function(d,s,id){var js,fjs=d.getElementsByTagName(s)[0];if(!d.getElementById(id)){js=d.createElement(s);js.id=id;js.src="//platform.twitter.com/widgets.js";fjs.parentNode.insertBefore(js,fjs);}}(document,"script","twitter-wjs"); (function() { var po = document.createElement('script'); po.type = 'text/javascript'; po.async = true; po.src = 'https://apis.google.com/js/plusone.js'; var s = document.getElementsByTagName('script')[0]; s.parentNode.insertBefore(po, s); })();

    Read the article

  • .NET HTML Sanitation for rich HTML Input

    - by Rick Strahl
    Recently I was working on updating a legacy application to MVC 4 that included free form text input. When I set up the new site my initial approach was to not allow any rich HTML input, only simple text formatting that would respect a few simple HTML commands for bold, lists etc. and automatically handles line break processing for new lines and paragraphs. This is typical for what I do with most multi-line text input in my apps and it works very well with very little development effort involved. Then the client sprung another note: Oh by the way we have a bunch of customers (real estate agents) who need to post complete HTML documents. Oh uh! There goes the simple theory. After some discussion and pleading on my part (<snicker>) to try and avoid this type of raw HTML input because of potential XSS issues, the client decided to go ahead and allow raw HTML input anyway. There has been lots of discussions on this subject on StackOverFlow (and here and here) but to after reading through some of the solutions I didn't really find anything that would work even closely for what I needed. Specifically we need to be able to allow just about any HTML markup, with the exception of script code. Remote CSS and Images need to be loaded, links need to work and so. While the 'legit' HTML posted by these agents is basic in nature it does span most of the full gamut of HTML (4). Most of the solutions XSS prevention/sanitizer solutions I found were way to aggressive and rendered the posted output unusable mostly because they tend to strip any externally loaded content. In short I needed a custom solution. I thought the best solution to this would be to use an HTML parser - in this case the Html Agility Pack - and then to run through all the HTML markup provided and remove any of the blacklisted tags and a number of attributes that are prone to JavaScript injection. There's much discussion on whether to use blacklists vs. whitelists in the discussions mentioned above, but I found that whitelists can make sense in simple scenarios where you might allow manual HTML input, but when you need to allow a larger array of HTML functionality a blacklist is probably easier to manage as the vast majority of elements and attributes could be allowed. Also white listing gets a bit more complex with HTML5 and the new proliferation of new HTML tags and most new tags generally don't affect XSS issues directly. Pure whitelisting based on elements and attributes also doesn't capture many edge cases (see some of the XSS cheat sheets listed below) so even with a white list, custom logic is still required to handle many of those edge cases. The Microsoft Web Protection Library (AntiXSS) My first thought was to check out the Microsoft AntiXSS library. Microsoft has an HTML Encoding and Sanitation library in the Microsoft Web Protection Library (formerly AntiXSS Library) on CodePlex, which provides stricter functions for whitelist encoding and sanitation. Initially I thought the Sanitation class and its static members would do the trick for me,but I found that this library is way too restrictive for my needs. Specifically the Sanitation class strips out images and links which rendered the full HTML from our real estate clients completely useless. I didn't spend much time with it, but apparently I'm not alone if feeling this library is not really useful without some way to configure operation. To give you an example of what didn't work for me with the library here's a small and simple HTML fragment that includes script, img and anchor tags. I would expect the script to be stripped and everything else to be left intact. Here's the original HTML:var value = "<b>Here</b> <script>alert('hello')</script> we go. Visit the " + "<a href='http://west-wind.com'>West Wind</a> site. " + "<img src='http://west-wind.com/images/new.gif' /> " ; and the code to sanitize it with the AntiXSS Sanitize class:@Html.Raw(Microsoft.Security.Application.Sanitizer.GetSafeHtmlFragment(value)) This produced a not so useful sanitized string: Here we go. Visit the <a>West Wind</a> site. While it removed the <script> tag (good) it also removed the href from the link and the image tag altogether (bad). In some situations this might be useful, but for most tasks I doubt this is the desired behavior. While links can contain javascript: references and images can 'broadcast' information to a server, without configuration to tell the library what to restrict this becomes useless to me. I couldn't find any way to customize the white list, nor is there code available in this 'open source' library on CodePlex. Using Html Agility Pack for HTML Parsing The WPL library wasn't going to cut it. After doing a bit of research I decided the best approach for a custom solution would be to use an HTML parser and inspect the HTML fragment/document I'm trying to import. I've used the HTML Agility Pack before for a number of apps where I needed an HTML parser without requiring an instance of a full browser like the Internet Explorer Application object which is inadequate in Web apps. In case you haven't checked out the Html Agility Pack before, it's a powerful HTML parser library that you can use from your .NET code. It provides a simple, parsable HTML DOM model to full HTML documents or HTML fragments that let you walk through each of the elements in your document. If you've used the HTML or XML DOM in a browser before you'll feel right at home with the Agility Pack. Blacklist based HTML Parsing to strip XSS Code For my purposes of HTML sanitation, the process involved is to walk the HTML document one element at a time and then check each element and attribute against a blacklist. There's quite a bit of argument of what's better: A whitelist of allowed items or a blacklist of denied items. While whitelists tend to be more secure, they also require a lot more configuration. In the case of HTML5 a whitelist could be very extensive. For what I need, I only want to ensure that no JavaScript is executed, so a blacklist includes the obvious <script> tag plus any tag that allows loading of external content including <iframe>, <object>, <embed> and <link> etc. <form>  is also excluded to avoid posting content to a different location. I also disallow <head> and <meta> tags in particular for my case, since I'm only allowing posting of HTML fragments. There is also some internal logic to exclude some attributes or attributes that include references to JavaScript or CSS expressions. The default tag blacklist reflects my use case, but is customizable and can be added to. Here's my HtmlSanitizer implementation:using System.Collections.Generic; using System.IO; using System.Xml; using HtmlAgilityPack; namespace Westwind.Web.Utilities { public class HtmlSanitizer { public HashSet<string> BlackList = new HashSet<string>() { { "script" }, { "iframe" }, { "form" }, { "object" }, { "embed" }, { "link" }, { "head" }, { "meta" } }; /// <summary> /// Cleans up an HTML string and removes HTML tags in blacklist /// </summary> /// <param name="html"></param> /// <returns></returns> public static string SanitizeHtml(string html, params string[] blackList) { var sanitizer = new HtmlSanitizer(); if (blackList != null && blackList.Length > 0) { sanitizer.BlackList.Clear(); foreach (string item in blackList) sanitizer.BlackList.Add(item); } return sanitizer.Sanitize(html); } /// <summary> /// Cleans up an HTML string by removing elements /// on the blacklist and all elements that start /// with onXXX . /// </summary> /// <param name="html"></param> /// <returns></returns> public string Sanitize(string html) { var doc = new HtmlDocument(); doc.LoadHtml(html); SanitizeHtmlNode(doc.DocumentNode); //return doc.DocumentNode.WriteTo(); string output = null; // Use an XmlTextWriter to create self-closing tags using (StringWriter sw = new StringWriter()) { XmlWriter writer = new XmlTextWriter(sw); doc.DocumentNode.WriteTo(writer); output = sw.ToString(); // strip off XML doc header if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(output)) { int at = output.IndexOf("?>"); output = output.Substring(at + 2); } writer.Close(); } doc = null; return output; } private void SanitizeHtmlNode(HtmlNode node) { if (node.NodeType == HtmlNodeType.Element) { // check for blacklist items and remove if (BlackList.Contains(node.Name)) { node.Remove(); return; } // remove CSS Expressions and embedded script links if (node.Name == "style") { if (string.IsNullOrEmpty(node.InnerText)) { if (node.InnerHtml.Contains("expression") || node.InnerHtml.Contains("javascript:")) node.ParentNode.RemoveChild(node); } } // remove script attributes if (node.HasAttributes) { for (int i = node.Attributes.Count - 1; i >= 0; i--) { HtmlAttribute currentAttribute = node.Attributes[i]; var attr = currentAttribute.Name.ToLower(); var val = currentAttribute.Value.ToLower(); span style="background: white; color: green">// remove event handlers if (attr.StartsWith("on")) node.Attributes.Remove(currentAttribute); // remove script links else if ( //(attr == "href" || attr== "src" || attr == "dynsrc" || attr == "lowsrc") && val != null && val.Contains("javascript:")) node.Attributes.Remove(currentAttribute); // Remove CSS Expressions else if (attr == "style" && val != null && val.Contains("expression") || val.Contains("javascript:") || val.Contains("vbscript:")) node.Attributes.Remove(currentAttribute); } } } // Look through child nodes recursively if (node.HasChildNodes) { for (int i = node.ChildNodes.Count - 1; i >= 0; i--) { SanitizeHtmlNode(node.ChildNodes[i]); } } } } } Please note: Use this as a starting point only for your own parsing and review the code for your specific use case! If your needs are less lenient than mine were you can you can make this much stricter by not allowing src and href attributes or CSS links if your HTML doesn't allow it. You can also check links for external URLs and disallow those - lots of options.  The code is simple enough to make it easy to extend to fit your use cases more specifically. It's also quite easy to make this code work using a WhiteList approach if you want to go that route. The code above is semi-generic for allowing full featured HTML fragments that only disallow script related content. The Sanitize method walks through each node of the document and then recursively drills into all of its children until the entire document has been traversed. Note that the code here uses an XmlTextWriter to write output - this is done to preserve XHTML style self-closing tags which are otherwise left as non-self-closing tags. The sanitizer code scans for blacklist elements and removes those elements not allowed. Note that the blacklist is configurable either in the instance class as a property or in the static method via the string parameter list. Additionally the code goes through each element's attributes and looks for a host of rules gleaned from some of the XSS cheat sheets listed at the end of the post. Clearly there are a lot more XSS vulnerabilities, but a lot of them apply to ancient browsers (IE6 and versions of Netscape) - many of these glaring holes (like CSS expressions - WTF IE?) have been removed in modern browsers. What a Pain To be honest this is NOT a piece of code that I wanted to write. I think building anything related to XSS is better left to people who have far more knowledge of the topic than I do. Unfortunately, I was unable to find a tool that worked even closely for me, or even provided a working base. For the project I was working on I had no choice and I'm sharing the code here merely as a base line to start with and potentially expand on for specific needs. It's sad that Microsoft Web Protection Library is currently such a train wreck - this is really something that should come from Microsoft as the systems vendor or possibly a third party that provides security tools. Luckily for my application we are dealing with a authenticated and validated users so the user base is fairly well known, and relatively small - this is not a wide open Internet application that's directly public facing. As I mentioned earlier in the post, if I had my way I would simply not allow this type of raw HTML input in the first place, and instead rely on a more controlled HTML input mechanism like MarkDown or even a good HTML Edit control that can provide some limits on what types of input are allowed. Alas in this case I was overridden and we had to go forward and allow *any* raw HTML posted. Sometimes I really feel sad that it's come this far - how many good applications and tools have been thwarted by fear of XSS (or worse) attacks? So many things that could be done *if* we had a more secure browser experience and didn't have to deal with every little script twerp trying to hack into Web pages and obscure browser bugs. So much time wasted building secure apps, so much time wasted by others trying to hack apps… We're a funny species - no other species manages to waste as much time, effort and resources as we humans do :-) Resources Code on GitHub Html Agility Pack XSS Cheat Sheet XSS Prevention Cheat Sheet Microsoft Web Protection Library (AntiXss) StackOverflow Links: http://stackoverflow.com/questions/341872/html-sanitizer-for-net http://blog.stackoverflow.com/2008/06/safe-html-and-xss/ http://code.google.com/p/subsonicforums/source/browse/trunk/SubSonic.Forums.Data/HtmlScrubber.cs?r=61© Rick Strahl, West Wind Technologies, 2005-2012Posted in Security  HTML  ASP.NET  JavaScript   Tweet !function(d,s,id){var js,fjs=d.getElementsByTagName(s)[0];if(!d.getElementById(id)){js=d.createElement(s);js.id=id;js.src="//platform.twitter.com/widgets.js";fjs.parentNode.insertBefore(js,fjs);}}(document,"script","twitter-wjs"); (function() { var po = document.createElement('script'); po.type = 'text/javascript'; po.async = true; po.src = 'https://apis.google.com/js/plusone.js'; var s = document.getElementsByTagName('script')[0]; s.parentNode.insertBefore(po, s); })();

    Read the article

  • Content Management for WebCenter Installation Guide

    - by Gary Niu
    Overvew As we known, there are two way to install Content Management for WebCenter. One way is install it by WebCenter installer wizard, another way is to install it use their own installer. This guide is for the later one. For SSO purpose, I also mentioned how to config OID identity store for Content Management for WebCenter. Content Management for WebCenter( 10.1.3.5.1) Oracle Enterprise Linux R5U4 Basic Installation -bash-3.2$ ./setup.sh Please select your locale from the list.           1. Chinese-Simplified           2. Chinese-Traditional           3. Deutsch          *4. English-US           5. English-UK           6. Español           7. Français           8. Italiano           9. Japanese          10. Korean          11. Nederlands          12. Português-Brazil Choice? Throughout the install, when entering a text value, you can press Enter to accept the default that appears between square brackets ([]). When selecting from a list, you can select the choice followed by an asterisk by pressing Enter. Select installation type from the list.         *1. Install new server          2. Update a server Choice? Content Server Installation Directory Please enter the full pathname to the installation directory. Content Server Core Folder [/oracle/ucm/server]:/opt/oracle/ucm/server Create Directory         *1. yes          2. no Choice? Java virtual machine         *1. Sun Java 1.5.0_11 JDK          2. Specify a custom Java virtual machine Choice? Installing with Java version 1.5.0_11. Enter the location of the native file repository. This directory contains the native files checked in by contributors. Content Server Native Vault Folder [/opt/oracle/ucm/server/vault/]: Create Directory         *1. yes          2. no Choice? Enter the location of the web-viewable file repository. This directory contains files that can be accessed through the web server. Content Server Weblayout Folder [/opt/oracle/ucm/server/weblayout/]: Create Directory         *1. yes          2. no Choice? This server can be configured to manage its own authentication or to allow another master to act as an authentication proxy. Configure this server as a master or proxied server.         *1. Configure as a master server.          2. Configure as server proxied by a local master server. Choice? During installation, an admin server can be installed and configured to manage this server. If there is already an admin server on this system, you can have the installer configure it to administrate this server instead. Select admin server configuration.         *1. Install an admin server to manage this server.          2. Configure an existing admin server to manage this server.          3. Don't configure an admin server. Choice? Enter the location of an executable to start your web browser. This browser will be used to display the online help. Web Browser Path [/usr/bin/firefox]: Content Server System locale           1. Chinese-Simplified           2. Chinese-Traditional           3. Deutsch          *4. English-US           5. English-UK           6. Español           7. Français           8. Italiano           9. Japanese          10. Korean          11. Nederlands          12. Português-Brazil Choice? Please select the region for your timezone from the list.         *1. Use the timezone setting for your operating system          2. Pacific          3. America          4. Atlantic          5. Europe          6. Africa          7. Asia          8. Indian          9. Australia Choice? Please enter the port number that will be used to connect to the Content Server. This port must be otherwise unused. Content Server Port [4444]: Please enter the port number that will be used to connect to the Admin Server. This port must be otherwise unused. Admin Server Port [4440]: Enter a security filter for the server port. Hosts which are allowed to communicate directly with the server port may access any resources managed by the server. Insure that hosts which need access are included in the filter. See the installation guide for more details. Incoming connection address filter [127.0.0.1]:*.*.*.* *** Content Server URL Prefix The URL prefix specified here is used when generating HTML pages that refer to the contents of the weblayout directory within the installation. This prefix must be mapped in the web server Additional Document Directories section of the Content Management administration menu to the physical location of the weblayout directory. For example, "/idc/" would be used in your installation to refer to the URL http://ucm.company.com/idc which would be mapped in the web server to the physical location /oracle/ucm/server/weblayout. Web Server Relative Root [/idc/]: Enter the name of the local mail server. The server will contact this system to deliver email. Company Mail Server [mail]: Enter the e-mail address for the system administrator. Administrator E-Mail Address [sysadmin@mail]: *** Web Server Address Many generated HTML pages refer to the web server you are using. The address specified here will be used when generating those pages. The address should include the host and domain name in most cases. If your webserver is running on a port other than 80, append a colon and the port number. Examples: www.company.com, ucm.company.com:90 Web Server HTTP Address [yekki]:yekki.cn.oracle.com:7777 Enter the name for this instance. This name should be unique across your entire enterprise. It may not contain characters other than letters, numbers, and underscores. Server Instance Name [idc]: Enter a short label for this instance. This label is used on web pages to identify this instance. It should be less than 12 characters long. Server Instance Label [idc]: Enter a long description for this instance. Server Description [Content Server idc]: Web Server         *1. Apache          2. Sun ONE          3. Configure manually Choice? Please select a database from the list below to use with the Content Server. Content Server Database         *1. Oracle          2. Microsoft SQL Server 2005          3. Microsoft SQL Server 2000          4. Sybase          5. DB2          6. Custom JDBC settings          7. Skip database configuration Choice? Manually configure JDBC settings for this database          1. yes         *2. no Choice? Oracle Server Hostname [localhost]: Oracle Listener Port Number [1521]: *** Database User ID The user name is used to log into the database used by the content server. Oracle User [user]:YEKKI_OCSERVER *** Database Password The password is used to log into the database used by the content server. Oracle Password []:oracle Oracle Instance Name [ORACLE]:orcl Configure the JVM to find the JDBC driver in a specific jar file          1. yes         *2. no Choice? The installer can attempt to create the database tables or you can manually create them. If you choose to manually create the tables, you should create them now. Attempt to create database tables          1. yes         *2. no Choice? Select components to install.          1. ContentFolios: Collect related items in folios          2. Folders_g: Organize content into hierarchical folders          3. LinkManager8: Hypertext link management support          4. OracleTextSearch: External Oracle 11g database as search indexer support          5. ThreadedDiscussions: Threaded discussion management Enter numbers separated by commas to toggle, 0 to unselect all, F to finish: 1,2,3,4,5         *1. ContentFolios: Collect related items in folios         *2. Folders_g: Organize content into hierarchical folders         *3. LinkManager8: Hypertext link management support         *4. OracleTextSearch: External Oracle 11g database as search indexer support         *5. ThreadedDiscussions: Threaded discussion management Enter numbers separated by commas to toggle, 0 to unselect all, F to finish: F Checking configuration. . . Configuration OK. Review install settings. . . Content Server Core Folder: /opt/oracle/ucm/server Java virtual machine: Sun Java 1.5.0_11 JDK Content Server Native Vault Folder: /opt/oracle/ucm/server/vault/ Content Server Weblayout Folder: /opt/oracle/ucm/server/weblayout/ Proxy authentication through another server: no Install admin server: yes Web Browser Path: /usr/bin/firefox Content Server System locale: English-US Content Server Port: 4444 Admin Server Port: 4440 Incoming connection address filter: *.*.*.* Web Server Relative Root: /idc/ Company Mail Server: mail Administrator E-Mail Address: sysadmin@mail Web Server HTTP Address: yekki.cn.oracle.com:7777 Server Instance Name: idc Server Instance Label: idc Server Description: Content Server idc Web Server: Apache Content Server Database: Oracle Manually configure JDBC settings for this database: false Oracle Server Hostname: localhost Oracle Listener Port Number: 1521 Oracle User: YEKKI_OCSERVER Oracle Password: 6GP1gBgzSyKa4JW10U8UqqPznr/lzkNn/Ojf6M8GJ8I= Oracle Instance Name: orcl Configure the JVM to find the JDBC driver in a specific jar file: false Attempt to create database tables: no Components: ContentFolios,Folders_g,LinkManager8,OracleTextSearch,ThreadedDiscussions Proceed with install         *1. Proceed          2. Change configuration          3. Recheck the configuration          4. Abort installation Choice? Finished install type Install with warnings at 4/2/10 12:32 AM. Run Scripts -bash-3.2$ ./wc_contentserverconfig.sh /opt/oracle/ucm/server /mnt/hgfs/SOFTWARE/ofm_ucm_generic_10.1.3.5.1_disk1_1of1/ContentServer/webcenter-conf Installing '/mnt/hgfs/SOFTWARE/ofm_ucm_generic_10.1.3.5.1_disk1_1of1/ContentServer/webcenter-conf/CS10gR35UpdateBundle.zip' Service 'DELETE_DOC' Extended Service 'DELETE_BYREV_REVISION' Extended Installing '/mnt/hgfs/SOFTWARE/ofm_ucm_generic_10.1.3.5.1_disk1_1of1/ContentServer/webcenter-conf/ContentAccess/ContentAccess-linux.zip' (internal)      04.02 00:40:38.019      main    updateDocMetaDefinitionV11: adding decimal column Installing '/opt/oracle/ucm/server/custom/CS10gR35UpdateBundle/extras/Folders_g.zip' Installing '/opt/oracle/ucm/server/custom/CS10gR35UpdateBundle/extras/FusionLibraries.zip' Installing '/opt/oracle/ucm/server/custom/CS10gR35UpdateBundle/extras/JpsUserProvider.zip' Installing '/mnt/hgfs/SOFTWARE/ofm_ucm_generic_10.1.3.5.1_disk1_1of1/ContentServer/webcenter-conf/WcConfigure.zip' Apr 2, 2010 12:41:24 AM oracle.security.jps.internal.core.util.JpsConfigUtil getPasswordCredential WARNING: A password credential is expected; instead found . Apr 2, 2010 12:41:24 AM oracle.security.jps.internal.idstore.util.IdentityStoreUtil getUnamePwdFromCredStore WARNING: The credential with map JPS and key ldap.credential does not exist. Apr 2, 2010 12:41:27 AM oracle.security.jps.internal.core.util.JpsConfigUtil getPasswordCredential WARNING: A password credential is expected; instead found . Apr 2, 2010 12:41:27 AM oracle.security.jps.internal.idstore.util.IdentityStoreUtil getUnamePwdFromCredStore WARNING: The credential with map JPS and key ldap.credential does not exist. Apr 2, 2010 12:41:28 AM oracle.security.jps.internal.core.util.JpsConfigUtil getPasswordCredential WARNING: A password credential is expected; instead found . Apr 2, 2010 12:41:28 AM oracle.security.jps.internal.idstore.util.IdentityStoreUtil getUnamePwdFromCredStore WARNING: The credential with map JPS and key ldap.credential does not exist. Restart Content Server to apply updates. Configuring Apache Web Server append the following lines at httpd.conf: include "/opt/oracle/ucm/server/data/users/apache22/apache.conf" Configuring the Identity Store( Optional ) 1.  Stop Oracle Content Server and the Admin Server 2.  Update the Oracle Content Server's JPS configuration file, jps-config.xml: a. add a service instance <serviceInstance provider="idstore.ldap.provider" name="idstore.oid"> <property name="subscriber.name" value="dc=cn,dc=oracle,dc=com"></property> <property name="idstore.type" value="OID"></property> <property name="security.principal.key" value="ldap.credential"></property> <property name="security.principal.alias" value="JPS"></property> <property name="ldap.url" value="ldap://yekki.cn.oracle.com:3060"></property> <extendedProperty> <name>user.search.bases</name> <values> <value>cn=users,dc=cn,dc=oracle,dc=com</value> </values> </extendedProperty> <extendedProperty> <name>group.search.bases</name> <values> <value>cn=groups,dc=cn,dc=oracle,dc=com</value> </values> </extendedProperty> <property name="username.attr" value="uid"></property> <property name="user.login.attr" value="uid"></property> <property name="groupname.attr" value="cn"></property> </serviceInstance> b. Ensure that the <jpsContext> entry in the jps-config.xml file refers to the new serviceInstance, that is, idstore.oid and not idstore.ldap: <jpsContext name="default"> <serviceInstanceRef ref="idstore.oid"/> 3. Run the new script to setup the credentials for idstore.oid in the credential store: cd CONTENT_SERVER_HOME/custom/FusionLibraries/tools -bash-3.2$ ./run_credtool.sh Buildfile: ./../tools/credtool.xml     [input] skipping input as property action has already been set.     [input] Alias: [JPS]     [input] Key: [ldap.credential]     [input] User Name: cn=orcladmin     [input] Password: welcome1     [input] JPS Config: [/opt/oracle/ucm/server/custom/FusionLibraries/tools/../../../config/jps-config.xml] manage-creds:      [echo] @@@ Help: run 'ant manage-creds' command to see the detailed usage      [java] Using default context in /opt/oracle/ucm/server/custom/FusionLibraries/tools/../../../config/jps-config.xml file for credential store.      [java] Credential store location : /opt/oracle/ucm/server/config      [java] Credential with map JPS key ldap.credential stored successfully!      [java]      [java]      [java]     Credential for map JPS and key ldap.credential is:      [java]             PasswordCredential name : cn=orcladmin      [java]             PasswordCredential password : welcome1 BUILD SUCCESSFUL Total time: 1 minute 27 seconds Testing 1. acces http://yekki.cn.oracle.com:7777/idc 2. login in with OID user, for example: orcladmin/welcome1 3. make sure your JpsUserProvider status is "good"

    Read the article

  • Configuring UCM cache to check for external Content Server changes

    - by Martin Deh
    Recently, I was involved in a customer scenario where they were modifying the Content Server's contributor data files directly through Content Server.  This operation of course is completely supported.  However, since the contributor data file was modified through the "backdoor", a running WebCenter Spaces page, which also used the same data file, would not get the updates immediately.  This was due to two reasons.  The first reason is that the Spaces page was using Content Presenter to display the contents of the data file. The second reason is that the Spaces application was using the "cached" version of the data file.  Fortunately, there is a way to configure cache so backdoor changes can be picked up more quickly and automatically. First a brief overview of Content Presenter.  The Content Presenter task flow enables WebCenter Spaces users with Page-Edit permissions to precisely customize the selection and presentation of content in a WebCenter Spaces application.  With Content Presenter, you can select a single item of content, contents under a folder, a list of items, or query for content, and then select a Content Presenter based template to render the content on a page in a Spaces application.  In addition to displaying the folders and the files in a Content Server, Content Presenter integrates with Oracle Site Studio to allow you to create, access, edit, and display Site Studio contributor data files (Content Server Document) in either a Site Studio region template or in a custom Content Presenter display template.  More information about creating Content Presenter Display Template can be found in the OFM Developers Guide for WebCenter Portal. The easiest way to configure the cache is to modify the WebCenter Spaces Content Server service connection setting through Enterprise Manager.  From here, under the Cache Details, there is a section to set the Cache Invalidation Interval.  Basically, this enables the cache to be monitored by the cache "sweeper" utility.  The cache sweeper queries for changes in the Content Server, and then "marks" the object in cache as "dirty".  This causes the application in turn to get a new copy of the document from the Content Server that replaces the cached version.  By default the initial value for the Cache Invalidation Interval is set to 0 (minutes).  This basically means that the sweeper is OFF.  To turn the sweeper ON, just set a value (in minutes).  The mininal value that can be set is 2 (minutes): Just a note.  In some instances, once the value of the Cache Invalidation Interval has been set (and saved) in the Enterprise Manager UI, it becomes "sticky" and the interval value cannot be set back to 0.  The good news is that this value can also be updated throught a WLST command.   The WLST command to run is as follows: setJCRContentServerConnection(appName, name, [socketType, url, serverHost, serverPort, keystoreLocation, keystorePassword, privateKeyAlias, privateKeyPassword, webContextRoot, clientSecurityPolicy, cacheInvalidationInterval, binaryCacheMaxEntrySize, adminUsername, adminPassword, extAppId, timeout, isPrimary, server, applicationVersion]) One way to get the required information for executing the command is to use the listJCRContentServerConnections('webcenter',verbose=true) command.  For example, this is the sample output from the execution: ------------------ UCM ------------------ Connection Name: UCM Connection Type: JCR External Appliction ID: Timeout: (not set) CIS Socket Type: socket CIS Server Hostname: webcenter.oracle.local CIS Server Port: 4444 CIS Keystore Location: CIS Private Key Alias: CIS Web URL: Web Server Context Root: /cs Client Security Policy: Admin User Name: sysadmin Cache Invalidation Interval: 2 Binary Cache Maximum Entry Size: 1024 The Documents primary connection is "UCM" From this information, the completed  setJCRContentServerConnection would be: setJCRContentServerConnection(appName='webcenter',name='UCM', socketType='socket', serverHost='webcenter.oracle.local', serverPort='4444', webContextRoot='/cs', cacheInvalidationInterval='0', binaryCacheMaxEntrySize='1024',adminUsername='sysadmin',isPrimary=1) Note: The Spaces managed server must be restarted for the change to take effect. More information about using WLST for WebCenter can be found here. Once the sweeper is turned ON, only cache objects that have been changed will be invalidated.  To test this out, I will go through a simple scenario.  The first thing to do is configure the Content Server so it can monitor and report on events.  Log into the Content Server console application, and under the Administration menu item, select System Audit Information.  Note: If your console is using the left menu display option, the Administration link will be located there. Under the Tracing Sections Information, add in only "system" and "requestaudit" in the Active Sections.  Check Full Verbose Tracing, check Save, then click the Update button.  Once this is done, select the View Server Output menu option.  This will change the browser view to display the log.  This is all that is needed to configure the Content Server. For example, the following is the View Server Output with the cache invalidation interval set to 2(minutes) Note the time stamp: requestaudit/6 08.30 09:52:26.001  IdcServer-68    GET_FOLDER_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.016933999955654144(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 09:52:26.010  IdcServer-69    GET_FOLDER_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.006134999915957451(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 09:52:26.014  IdcServer-70    GET_DOCUMENT_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.004271999932825565(secs) ... other trace info ... requestaudit/6 08.30 09:54:26.002  IdcServer-71    GET_FOLDER_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.020323999226093292(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 09:54:26.011  IdcServer-72    GET_FOLDER_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.017928000539541245(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 09:54:26.017  IdcServer-73    GET_DOCUMENT_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.010185999795794487(secs) Now that the tracing logs are reporting correctly, the next step is set up the Spaces app to test the sweeper. I will use 2 different pages that will use Content Presenter task flows.  Each task flow will use a different custom Content Presenter display template, and will be assign 2 different contributor data files (document that will be in the cache).  The pages at run time appear as follows: Initially, when the Space pages containing the content is loaded in the browser for the first time, you can see the tracing information in the Content Server output viewer. requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:12.030 IdcServer-129 CLEAR_SERVER_OUTPUT [dUser=weblogic] 0.029171999543905258(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:12.101 IdcServer-130 GET_SERVER_OUTPUT [dUser=weblogic] 0.025721000507473946(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:26.592 IdcServer-131 VCR_GET_DOCUMENT_BY_NAME [dID=919][dDocName=DF_UCMCACHETESTER][dDocTitle=DF_UCMCacheTester][dUser=weblogic][RevisionSelectionMethod=LatestReleased][IsJava=1] 0.21525299549102783(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:27.117 IdcServer-132 VCR_GET_CONTENT_TYPES [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.5059549808502197(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:27.146 IdcServer-133 VCR_GET_CONTENT_TYPE [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.03360399976372719(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:27.169 IdcServer-134 VCR_GET_CONTENT_TYPE [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.008806000463664532(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:27.204 IdcServer-135 VCR_GET_CONTENT_TYPE [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.013265999965369701(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:27.384 IdcServer-136 VCR_GET_CONTENT_TYPE [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.18119299411773682(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:27.533 IdcServer-137 VCR_GET_CONTENT_TYPE [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.1519480049610138(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:27.634 IdcServer-138 VCR_GET_CONTENT_TYPE [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.10827399790287018(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:27.687 IdcServer-139 VCR_GET_CONTENT_TYPE [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.059702999889850616(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:28.271 IdcServer-140 GET_USER_PERMISSIONS [dUser=weblogic][IsJava=1] 0.006703000050038099(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:28.285 IdcServer-141 GET_ENVIRONMENT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.010893999598920345(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:30.433 IdcServer-142 GET_SERVER_OUTPUT [dUser=weblogic] 0.017318999394774437(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:41.837 IdcServer-143 VCR_GET_DOCUMENT_BY_NAME [dID=508][dDocName=113_ES][dDocTitle=Landing Home][dUser=weblogic][RevisionSelectionMethod=LatestReleased][IsJava=1] 0.15937699377536774(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:51:42.781 IdcServer-144 GET_FILE [dID=326][dDocName=WEBCENTERORACL000315][dDocTitle=Duke][dUser=anonymous][RevisionSelectionMethod=LatestReleased][dSecurityGroup=Public][xCollectionID=0] 0.16288499534130096(secs) The highlighted sections show where the 2 data files DF_UCMCACHETESTER (P1 page) and 113_ES (P2 page) were called by the (Spaces) VCR connection to the Content Server. The most important line to notice is the VCR_GET_DOCUMENT_BY_NAME invocation.  On subsequent refreshes of these 2 pages, you will notice (after you refresh the Content Server's View Server Output) that there are no further traces of the same VCR_GET_DOCUMENT_BY_NAME invocations.  This is because the pages are getting the documents from the cache. The next step is to go through the "backdoor" and change one of the documents through the Content Server console.  This operation can be done by first locating the data file document, and from the Content Information page, select Edit Data File menu option.   This invokes the Site Studio Contributor, where the modifications can be made. Refreshing the Content Server View Server Output, the tracing displays the operations perform on the document.  requestaudit/6 08.30 11:56:59.972 IdcServer-255 SS_CHECKOUT_BY_NAME [dID=922][dDocName=DF_UCMCACHETESTER][dUser=weblogic][dSecurityGroup=Public] 0.05558200180530548(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:57:00.065 IdcServer-256 SS_GET_CONTRIBUTOR_CONFIG [dID=922][dDocName=DF_UCMCACHETESTER][dDocTitle=DF_UCMCacheTester][dUser=weblogic][dSecurityGroup=Public][xCollectionID=0] 0.08632399886846542(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:57:00.470 IdcServer-259 DOC_INFO_BY_NAME [dID=922][dDocName=DF_UCMCACHETESTER][dDocTitle=DF_UCMCacheTester][dUser=weblogic][dSecurityGroup=Public][xCollectionID=0] 0.02268899977207184(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:57:10.177 IdcServer-264 GET_FOLDER_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.007652000058442354(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:57:10.181 IdcServer-263 GET_FOLDER_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.01868399977684021(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:57:10.187 IdcServer-265 GET_DOCUMENT_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.009367000311613083(secs) (internal)/6 08.30 11:57:26.118 IdcServer-266 File to be removed: /oracle/app/admin/domains/webcenter/ucm/cs/vault/~temp/703253295.xml (internal)/6 08.30 11:57:26.121 IdcServer-266 File to be removed: /oracle/app/admin/domains/webcenter/ucm/cs/vault/~temp/703253295.xml requestaudit/6 08.30 11:57:26.122 IdcServer-266 SS_SET_ELEMENT_DATA [dID=923][dDocName=DF_UCMCACHETESTER][dDocTitle=DF_UCMCacheTester][dUser=weblogic][dSecurityGroup=Public][xCollectionID=0][StatusCode=0][StatusMessage=Successfully checked in content item 'DF_UCMCACHETESTER'.] 0.3765290081501007(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:57:30.710 IdcServer-267 DOC_INFO_BY_NAME [dID=923][dDocName=DF_UCMCACHETESTER][dDocTitle=DF_UCMCacheTester][dUser=weblogic][dSecurityGroup=Public][xCollectionID=0] 0.07942699640989304(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:57:30.733 IdcServer-268 SS_GET_CONTRIBUTOR_STRINGS [dUser=weblogic] 0.0044570001773536205(secs) After a few moments and refreshing the P1 page, the updates has been applied. Note: The refresh time may very, since the Cache Invalidation Interval (set to 2 minutes) is not determined by when changes happened.  The sweeper just runs every 2 minutes. Refreshing the Content Server View Server Output, the tracing displays the important information. requestaudit/6 08.30 11:59:10.171 IdcServer-270 GET_FOLDER_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.00952600035816431(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:59:10.179 IdcServer-271 GET_FOLDER_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.011118999682366848(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:59:10.182 IdcServer-272 GET_DOCUMENT_HISTORY_REPORT [dUser=sysadmin][IsJava=1] 0.007447000127285719(secs) requestaudit/6 08.30 11:59:16.885 IdcServer-273 VCR_GET_DOCUMENT_BY_NAME [dID=923][dDocName=DF_UCMCACHETESTER][dDocTitle=DF_UCMCacheTester][dUser=weblogic][RevisionSelectionMethod=LatestReleased][IsJava=1] 0.0786449983716011(secs) After the specifed interval time the sweeper is invoked, which is noted by the GET_ ... calls.  Since the history has noted the change, the next call is to the VCR_GET_DOCUMENT_BY_NAME to retrieve the new version of the (modifed) data file.  Navigating back to the P2 page, and viewing the server output, there are no further VCR_GET_DOCUMENT_BY_NAME to retrieve the data file.  This simply means that this data file was just retrieved from the cache.   Upon further review of the server output, we can see that there was only 1 request for the VCR_GET_DOCUMENT_BY_NAME: requestaudit/6 08.30 12:08:00.021 Audit Request Monitor Request Audit Report over the last 120 Seconds for server webcenteroraclelocal16200****  requestaudit/6 08.30 12:08:00.021 Audit Request Monitor -Num Requests 8 Errors 0 Reqs/sec. 0.06666944175958633 Avg. Latency (secs) 0.02762500010430813 Max Thread Count 2  requestaudit/6 08.30 12:08:00.021 Audit Request Monitor 1 Service VCR_GET_DOCUMENT_BY_NAME Total Elapsed Time (secs) 0.09200000017881393 Num requests 1 Num errors 0 Avg. Latency (secs) 0.09200000017881393  requestaudit/6 08.30 12:08:00.021 Audit Request Monitor 2 Service GET_PERSONALIZED_JAVASCRIPT Total Elapsed Time (secs) 0.054999999701976776 Num requests 1 Num errors 0 Avg. Latency (secs) 0.054999999701976776  requestaudit/6 08.30 12:08:00.021 Audit Request Monitor 3 Service GET_FOLDER_HISTORY_REPORT Total Elapsed Time (secs) 0.028999999165534973 Num requests 2 Num errors 0 Avg. Latency (secs) 0.014499999582767487  requestaudit/6 08.30 12:08:00.021 Audit Request Monitor 4 Service GET_SERVER_OUTPUT Total Elapsed Time (secs) 0.017999999225139618 Num requests 1 Num errors 0 Avg. Latency (secs) 0.017999999225139618  requestaudit/6 08.30 12:08:00.021 Audit Request Monitor 5 Service GET_FILE Total Elapsed Time (secs) 0.013000000268220901 Num requests 1 Num errors 0 Avg. Latency (secs) 0.013000000268220901  requestaudit/6 08.30 12:08:00.021 Audit Request Monitor ****End Audit Report*****  

    Read the article

  • Implementing History Support using jQuery for AJAX websites built on asp.net AJAX

    - by anil.kasalanati
    Problem Statement: Most modern day website use AJAX for page navigation and gone are the days of complete HTTP redirection so it is imperative that we support back and forward buttons on the browser so that end users navigation is not broken. In this article we discuss about solutions which are already available and problems with them. Microsoft History Support: Post .Net 3.5 sp1 Microsoft’s Script manager supports history for websites using Update panels. This is achieved by enabling the ENABLE HISTORY property for the script manager and then the event “Page_Browser_Navigate” needs to be handled. So whenever the browser buttons are clicked the event is fired and the application can write code to do the navigation. The following articles provide good tutorials on how to do that http://www.asp.net/aspnet-in-net-35-sp1/videos/introduction-to-aspnet-ajax-history http://www.codeproject.com/KB/aspnet/ajaxhistorymanagement.aspx And Microsoft api internally creates an IFrame and changes the bookmark of the url. Unfortunately this has a bug and it does not work in Ie6 and 7 which are the major browsers but it works in ie8 and Firefox. And Microsoft has apparently fixed this bug in .Net 4.0. Following is the blog http://weblogs.asp.net/joshclose/archive/2008/11/11/asp-net-ajax-addhistorypoint-bug.aspx For solutions which are still running on .net 3.5 sp1 there is no solution which Microsoft offers so there is  are two way to solve this o   Disable the back button. o   Develop custom solution.   Disable back button Even though this might look like a very simple thing to do there are issues around doing this  because there is no event which can be manipulated from the javascript. The browser does not provide an api to do this. So most of the technical solution on internet offer work arounds like doing a history.forward(1) so that even if the user clicks a back button the destination page redirects the user to the original page. This is not a good customer experience and does not work for asp.net website where there are different views in the same page. There are other ways around detecting the window unload events and writing code there. So there are 2 events onbeforeUnload and onUnload and we can write code to show a confirmation message to the user. If we write code in onUnLoad then we can only show a message but it is too late to stop the navigation. And if we write on onBeforeUnLoad we can stop the navigation if the user clicks cancel but this event would be triggered for all AJAX calls and hyperlinks where the href is anything other than #. We can do this but the website has to be checked properly to ensure there are no links where href is not # otherwise the user would see a popup message saying “you are leaving the website”. Believe me after doing a lot of research on the back button disable I found it easier to support it rather than disabling the button. So I am going to discuss a solution which work  using jQuery with some tweaking. Custom Solution JQuery already provides an api to manage the history of a AJAX website - http://plugins.jquery.com/project/history We need to integrate this with Microsoft Page request manager so that both of them work in tandem. The page state is maintained in the cookie so that it can be passed to the server and I used jQuery cookie plug in for that – http://plugins.jquery.com/node/1386/release Firstly when the page loads there is a need to hook up all the events on the page which needs to cause browser history and following is the code to that. jQuery(document).ready(function() {             // Initialize history plugin.             // The callback is called at once by present location.hash.             jQuery.history.init(pageload);               // set onlick event for buttons             jQuery("a[@rel='history']").click(function() {                 //                 var hash = this.page;                 hash = hash.replace(/^.*#/, '');                 isAsyncPostBack = true;                 // moves to a new page.                 // pageload is called at once.                 jQuery.history.load(hash);                 return true;             });         }); The above scripts basically gets all the DOM objects which have the attribute rel=”history” and add the event. In our test page we have the link button  which has the attribute rel set to history. <asp:LinkButton ID="Previous" rel="history" runat="server" onclick="PreviousOnClick">Previous</asp:LinkButton> <asp:LinkButton ID="AsyncPostBack" rel="history" runat="server" onclick="NextOnClick">Next</asp:LinkButton> <asp:LinkButton ID="HistoryLinkButton" runat="server" style="display:none" onclick="HistoryOnClick"></asp:LinkButton>   And you can see that there is an hidden HistoryLinkButton which used to send a sever side postback in case of browser back or previous buttons. And note that we need to use display:none and not visible= false because asp.net AJAX would disallow any post backs if visible=false. And in general the pageload event get executed on the client side when a back or forward is pressed and the function is shown below function pageload(hash) {                   if (hash) {                         if (!isAsyncPostBack) {                           jQuery.cookie("page", hash);                     __doPostBack("HistoryLinkButton", "");                 }                isAsyncPostBack = false;                             } else {                 // start page             jQuery("#load").empty();             }         }   As you can see in case there is an hash in the url we are basically do an asp.net AJAX post back using the following statement __doPostBack("HistoryLinkButton", ""); So whenever the user clicks back or forward the post back happens using the event statement we provide and Previous event code is invoked in the code behind.  We need to have the code to use the pageId present in the url to change the page content. And there is an important thing to note – because the hash is worked out using the pageId’s there is a need to recalculate the hash after every AJAX post back so following code is plugged in function ReWorkHash() {             jQuery("a[@rel='history']").unbind("click");             jQuery("a[@rel='history']").click(function() {                 //                 var hash = jQuery(this).attr("page");                 hash = hash.replace(/^.*#/, '');                 jQuery.cookie("page", hash);                 isAsyncPostBack = true;                                   // moves to a new page.                 // pageload is called at once.                 jQuery.history.load(hash);                 return true;             });        }   This code is executed from the code behind using ScriptManager RegisterClientScriptBlock as shown below –       ScriptManager.RegisterClientScriptBlock(this, typeof(_Default), "Recalculater", "ReWorkHash();", true);   A sample application is available to be downloaded at the following location – http://techconsulting.vpscustomer.com/Source/HistoryTest.zip And a working sample is available at – http://techconsulting.vpscustomer.com/Samples/Default.aspx

    Read the article

  • Where do I find scripts generated by SharePoint MCMS Migration Profiles

    - by HipCzeck
    I am attempting to migrate data from an Microsoft Content Management Server (MCMS) 2002 instance into a new Microsoft Office Sharepoint Server (MOSS) 2007 installation using the Manage Microsoft Content Management Server Migration Profiles tool in the Operations space of MOSS Central Administration. When analyzing the profile, I receive 4 warnings, all of which may be safely ignored, but when I actually execute the migration profile, I get the same warnings and an additional error with a description of: Line 6: Incorrect syntax near ';'. I have seen this error numerous times when mucking about in SQL Server and recognize it as a Transact SQL error message, but can't find the actual SQL statement that is being executed so that I may determine the source of the error. EDIT: After enabling verbose logging on the MCMS 2002 Migration category, and poring through the Unified Logging Service (ULS) logs, I received a more complete stack trace at the point of the error, and a couple more anomalies listed below. Anomalies: The following is an abbreviated listing from the ULS logs around the time of the pre-migration analysis. 01 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Start ConnectionCheck 02 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose End ConnectionCheck 03 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Start DatabaseCheck 04 MCMS 2002 Migration High Extra table SiteDeployLock will not be migrated 05 MCMS 2002 Migration High Analysis: Extra index PK__SiteDeployLock__05D8E0BE 06 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose End DatabaseCheck 07 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: RootCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 08 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: RightsGroupNameCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 09 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: InvalidNameCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 10 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: LeafNameCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 11 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: LeafLengthCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 12 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: TemplateNameCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 13 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: TemplateCollisionCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 14 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: PlaceholderCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 15 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: CheckedOutItemsCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 16 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: SubmittedItemsCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 17 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: DeletedItemsCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 18 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: UserCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 19 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: FileSizeCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 20 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium Pre-migration analysis: HostHeaderMapCheckTask is skipped because database check is blocked. 21 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Start Server check 22 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose End Server check 23 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Start Server emptyness check 24 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose End Server emptyness check 25 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium PreMigrationAnalyzer: Dry run starts 26 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose CleanLockProcedure: start. 27 MCMS 2002 Migration High CleanLockProcedure: connection system lock is null 28 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Finished all tasks 29 MCMS 2002 Migration High PreMigrationAnalyzer ends with True 30 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Migration profile status is changed to AnalysisPassed Specifically, the two High level alerts on lines 4 and 5 are reflected in the migration report as warnings when running Pre-migration Analysis or running the migration profile. In addition, two other warnings appear in the migration report indicating two tables containing data (LayoutProperty and NodeLayout) that should be empty. According to the documentation, warnings are not sufficient cause to stop migration from occurring. Other anomalies are on lines 7-20 indicating a series of tests that are skipped because database check is blocked. The ULS doesn't give any additional warnings to indicate that the database check was blocked or exited in exceptional circumstances. After switching the profile from pre-migration analysis to exporting, there is one medium level warning that LastChangeTime is not set or incorrect. (null). As with all the skipped test names and SQL table names from the warnings, the major search engines are unable (with the exception of LayoutProperty) to find any reference to these objects or tests. Finally, the section of the log indicating the actual live migration attempt is appended below: 01 MCMS 2002 Migration Medium LastChangeTime is not set or incorrect. (null) 02 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Set export lock 03 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose CleanLockProcedure: start. 04 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose CleanLockProcedure: end. 05 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Prepare for export 06 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Open connection... 07 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Create temporary stored procedures 08 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Create temporary tables... 09 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Initialize temporary tables... 10 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose InitializeTemporaryTables: start 11 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Initialize export table... 12 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose InitializeExportTable: start 13 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose CleanLockProcedure: start. 14 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose CleanLockProcedure: end. 15 MCMS 2002 Migration High Migration throws exception: Line 6: Incorrect syntax near ';'.. Stacktrace: at System.Data.SqlClient.SqlConnection.OnError(SqlException exception, Boolean breakConnection) at System.Data.SqlClient.TdsParser.ThrowExceptionAndWarning(TdsParserStateObject stateObj) at System.Data.SqlClient.TdsParser.Run(RunBehavior runBehavior, SqlCommand cmdHandler, SqlDataReader dataStream, BulkCopySimpleResultSet bulkCopyHandler, TdsParserStateObject stateObj) at System.Data.SqlClient.SqlCommand.RunExecuteNonQueryTds(String methodName, Boolean async) at System.Data.SqlClient.SqlCommand.InternalExecuteNonQuery(DbAsyncResult result, String methodName, Boolean sendToPipe) at System.Data.SqlClient.SqlCommand.ExecuteNonQuery() at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration... 16 MCMS 2002 Migration High ....MigrationBatchCommand.ExecuteImmediate(String command) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationBatchCommand.ExecuteWaitingCommands() at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationDBSerializer.SerializeSelectedExportObject(StringCollection objectAttribs) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationDataAccess.InitializeExportTable(ScopeType scopeType) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationDataAccess.InitializeTemporaryTables(DateTime lastChangeTime) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationDataAccess.InitializeDatabase(DateTime lastChangeTime, Boolean isAnalysis, SqlConnection connection) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Admin... 17 MCMS 2002 Migration High ...stration.MigrationDataAccess.InitializeDatabase(DateTime lastChangeTime, Boolean isAnalysis) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Administration.ContentMigration.Export(MigrationDataAccess dataAccess) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Administration.ContentMigration.MigrateInternal(). 18 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose MigrationProfile: GetInstance. Start. 19 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose MigrationProfile: GetInstance. End. 20 MCMS 2002 Migration Verbose Migration profile status is changed to Failed The stack trace of the failed parsing of the SQL command appear on lines 15-17. A cleaner version of the stack trace is appended below. Full Stack Trace: Migration throws exception: Line 6: Incorrect syntax near ';'.. at System.Data.SqlClient.SqlConnection.OnError(SqlException exception, Boolean breakConnection) at System.Data.SqlClient.TdsParser.ThrowExceptionAndWarning( TdsParserStateObject stateObj) at System.Data.SqlClient.TdsParser.Run(RunBehavior runBehavior, SqlCommand cmdHandler, SqlDataReader dataStream, BulkCopySimpleResultSet bulkCopyHandler, TdsParserStateObject stateObj) at System.Data.SqlClient.SqlCommand.RunExecuteNonQueryTds(String methodName, Boolean async) at System.Data.SqlClient.SqlCommand.InternalExecuteNonQuery(DbAsyncResult result, String methodName, Boolean sendToPipe) at System.Data.SqlClient.SqlCommand.ExecuteNonQuery() at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationBatchCommand .ExecuteImmediate(String command) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationBatchCommand .ExecuteWaitingCommands() at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationDBSerializer .SerializeSelectedExportObject(StringCollection objectAttribs) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationDataAccess .InitializeExportTable(ScopeType scopeType) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationDataAccess .InitializeTemporaryTables(DateTime lastChangeTime) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationDataAccess .InitializeDatabase(DateTime lastChangeTime, Boolean isAnalysis, SqlConnection connection) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Internal.Administration.MigrationDataAccess .InitializeDatabase(DateTime lastChangeTime, Boolean isAnalysis) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Administration.ContentMigration.Export (MigrationDataAccess dataAccess) at Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Administration.ContentMigration .MigrateInternal(). None of this log information indicates the SQL command that is failing a parser check. I've checked the SQL servers hosting the source and destination databases for a trace of the query, but neither seems to have triggered the parse failure condition. That appears to have happened on the SharePoint server. Are there any other locations I should investigate that might tell me where to find the source of the error?

    Read the article

  • Active Directory and Apple's Workgroup Manager

    - by qbn
    I thought I'd share my experiences here. I work for a small business with only ~20 users. I wanted the ability to use managed client preferences to assign things like the software update server. Basically the ability to manage my Macs easily and in a native way. At first I tried the magic triangle solution, but I found this to be very complicated. Not only does it require a Mac OS X Server, but it gives you two points of failure. Additionally each Mac workstation must be bound to both servers. Eventually I sucked it up and went with the schema changes documented here. I was hesitant at first, because the instructions require a lot of manual work. However it was fairly basic and only took me about an hour and a half. Below you'll find the schema changes file that was a result of my work. I followed the instructions exactly and double checked everything, after six months of having this in place things have been running great. Too good to not share. I hope I save someone a couple of hours. # ================================================================== # # This file should be imported with the following command: # ldifde -i -u -f Apple AD Schema Changes.ldf -s server:port -b username domain password -j . -c "cn=Configuration,dc=X" #configurationNamingContext # LDIFDE.EXE from AD/AM V1.0 or above must be used. # This LDIF file should be imported into AD or AD/AM. It may not work for other directories. # # ================================================================== # ================================================================== # Attributes # ================================================================== # Attribute: apple-category dn: cn=apple-category,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.10.4 ldapDisplayName: apple-category attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: Category for the computer or neighborhood oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-computeralias dn: cn=apple-computeralias,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.20.3 ldapDisplayName: apple-computeralias attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: XML plist referring to a computer record oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-computer-list-groups dn: cn=apple-computer-list-groups,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.11.4 ldapDisplayName: apple-computer-list-groups attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: groups oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-computers dn: cn=apple-computers,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.11.3 ldapDisplayName: apple-computers attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: computers oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-data-stamp dn: cn=apple-data-stamp,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.12.2 ldapDisplayName: apple-data-stamp attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: data stamp oMSyntax: 22 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-dns-domain dn: cn=apple-dns-domain,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.18.1 ldapDisplayName: apple-dns-domain attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: DNS domain oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-dnsname dn: cn=apple-dnsname,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.4 ldapDisplayName: apple-dnsname attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: DNS name oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-dns-nameserver dn: cn=apple-dns-nameserver,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.18.2 ldapDisplayName: apple-dns-nameserver attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: DNS name server list oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-group-homeowner dn: cn=apple-group-homeowner,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.14.2 ldapDisplayName: apple-group-homeowner attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: group home owner settings oMSyntax: 22 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-group-homeurl dn: cn=apple-group-homeurl,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.14.1 ldapDisplayName: apple-group-homeurl attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: group home url oMSyntax: 22 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-imhandle dn: cn=apple-imhandle,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.21 ldapDisplayName: apple-imhandle attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: IM handle (service:account name) oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-keyword dn: cn=apple-keyword,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.19 ldapDisplayName: apple-keyword attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: keywords oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-mcxflags dn: cn=apple-mcxflags,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.10 ldapDisplayName: apple-mcxflags attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: mcx flags oMSyntax: 64 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-mcxsettings dn: cn=apple-mcxsettings,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.16 ldapDisplayName: apple-mcxsettings attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: mcx settings oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-neighborhoodalias dn: cn=apple-neighborhoodalias,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.20.2 ldapDisplayName: apple-neighborhoodalias attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: XML plist referring to another neighborhood record oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-networkview dn: cn=apple-networkview,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.10.3 ldapDisplayName: apple-networkview attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: Network view for the computer oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-nodepathxml dn: cn=apple-nodepathxml,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.20.1 ldapDisplayName: apple-nodepathxml attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: XML plist of directory node path oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-service-location dn: cn=apple-service-location,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.5 ldapDisplayName: apple-service-location attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: Service location oMSyntax: 64 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-service-port dn: cn=apple-service-port,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.3 ldapDisplayName: apple-service-port attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.9 adminDescription: Service port number oMSyntax: 2 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-service-type dn: cn=apple-service-type,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.1 ldapDisplayName: apple-service-type attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: type of service oMSyntax: 22 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-service-url dn: cn=apple-service-url,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.2 ldapDisplayName: apple-service-url attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: URL of service oMSyntax: 22 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-user-authenticationhint dn: cn=apple-user-authenticationhint,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.15 ldapDisplayName: apple-user-authenticationhint attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: password hint oMSyntax: 64 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-user-class dn: cn=apple-user-class,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.7 ldapDisplayName: apple-user-class attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: user class oMSyntax: 22 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-user-homequota dn: cn=apple-user-homequota,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.8 ldapDisplayName: apple-user-homequota attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: home directory quota oMSyntax: 22 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-user-homesoftquota dn: cn=apple-user-homesoftquota,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.17 ldapDisplayName: apple-user-homesoftquota attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: home directory soft quota oMSyntax: 22 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-user-homeurl dn: cn=apple-user-homeurl,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.6 ldapDisplayName: apple-user-homeurl attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: home directory URL oMSyntax: 22 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-user-mailattribute dn: cn=apple-user-mailattribute,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.9 ldapDisplayName: apple-user-mailattribute attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: mail attribute oMSyntax: 64 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-user-picture dn: cn=apple-user-picture,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.12 ldapDisplayName: apple-user-picture attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: picture oMSyntax: 64 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-user-printattribute dn: cn=apple-user-printattribute,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.13 ldapDisplayName: apple-user-printattribute attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: print attribute oMSyntax: 64 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-webloguri dn: cn=apple-webloguri,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.22 ldapDisplayName: apple-webloguri attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: Weblog URI oMSyntax: 64 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: apple-xmlplist dn: cn=apple-xmlplist,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.17.1 ldapDisplayName: apple-xmlplist attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: XML plist data oMSyntax: 64 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: ipHostNumber dn: cn=ipHostNumber,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.1.1.1.19 ldapDisplayName: ipHostNumber attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: IP address oMSyntax: 22 systemOnly: FALSE rangeUpper: 128 # Attribute: macAddress dn: cn=macAddress,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.1.1.1.22 ldapDisplayName: macAddress attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: MAC address oMSyntax: 22 systemOnly: FALSE rangeUpper: 128 # Attribute: mountDirectory dn: cn=apple-mountDirectory,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.8.1 ldapDisplayName: mountDirectory attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.12 adminDescription: mount path oMSyntax: 64 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: mountDumpFrequency dn: cn=apple-mountDumpFrequency,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.8.4 ldapDisplayName: mountDumpFrequency attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: mount dump frequency oMSyntax: 22 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: mountOption dn: cn=apple-mountOption,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.8.3 ldapDisplayName: mountOption attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: mount options oMSyntax: 22 systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: mountPassNo dn: cn=apple-mountPassNo,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.8.5 ldapDisplayName: mountPassNo attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: mount passno oMSyntax: 22 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: mountType dn: cn=apple-mountType,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.8.2 ldapDisplayName: mountType attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.5 adminDescription: mount VFS type oMSyntax: 22 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE # Attribute: ttl dn: cn=ttl,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: attributeSchema attributeId: 1.3.6.1.4.1.250.1.60 ldapDisplayName: ttl attributeSyntax: 2.5.5.9 oMSyntax: 2 isSingleValued: TRUE systemOnly: FALSE dn: changetype: modify add: schemaUpdateNow schemaUpdateNow: 1 - # ================================================================== # Classes # ================================================================== # Class: apple-computer dn: cn=apple-computer,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: classSchema governsID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.2.10 ldapDisplayName: apple-computer adminDescription: computer objectClassCategory: 3 # subclassOf: top subclassOf: 2.5.6.0 # rdnAttId: cn rdnAttId: 2.5.4.3 # mayContain: apple-category mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.10.4 # mayContain: apple-computer-list-groups mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.11.4 # mayContain: apple-keyword mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.19 # mayContain: apple-mcxflags mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.10 # mayContain: apple-mcxsettings mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.16 # mayContain: apple-networkview mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.10.3 # mayContain: apple-service-url mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.2 # mayContain: apple-xmlplist mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.17.1 # mayContain: macAddress mayContain: 1.3.6.1.1.1.1.22 # mayContain: ttl mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.250.1.60 # Class: apple-computer-list dn: cn=apple-computer-list,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: classSchema governsID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.2.11 ldapDisplayName: apple-computer-list adminDescription: computer list objectClassCategory: 1 # subclassOf: top subclassOf: 2.5.6.0 # rdnAttId: cn rdnAttId: 2.5.4.3 # mayContain: apple-computer-list-groups mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.11.4 # mayContain: apple-computers mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.11.3 # mayContain: apple-keyword mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.19 # mayContain: apple-mcxflags mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.10 # mayContain: apple-mcxsettings mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.16 possSuperiors: organizationalUnit possSuperiors: container # Class: apple-configuration dn: cn=apple-configuration,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: classSchema governsID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.2.12 ldapDisplayName: apple-configuration adminDescription: configuration objectClassCategory: 3 # subclassOf: top subclassOf: 2.5.6.0 # rdnAttId: cn rdnAttId: 2.5.4.3 # mayContain: apple-data-stamp mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.12.2 # mayContain: apple-keyword mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.19 # mayContain: apple-xmlplist mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.17.1 # mayContain: ttl mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.250.1.60 possSuperiors: organizationalUnit possSuperiors: container # Class: apple-group dn: cn=apple-group,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: classSchema governsID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.2.14 ldapDisplayName: apple-group adminDescription: group account objectClassCategory: 3 # subclassOf: top subclassOf: 2.5.6.0 # rdnAttId: cn rdnAttId: 2.5.4.3 # mayContain: apple-group-homeowner mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.14.2 # mayContain: apple-group-homeurl mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.14.1 # mayContain: apple-keyword mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.19 # mayContain: apple-mcxflags mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.10 # mayContain: apple-mcxsettings mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.16 # mayContain: apple-user-picture mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.12 # mayContain: ttl mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.250.1.60 # Class: apple-location dn: cn=apple-location,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: classSchema governsID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.2.18 ldapDisplayName: apple-location objectClassCategory: 1 # subclassOf: top subclassOf: 2.5.6.0 # rdnAttId: cn rdnAttId: 2.5.4.3 # mayContain: apple-dns-domain mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.18.1 # mayContain: apple-dns-nameserver mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.18.2 possSuperiors: organizationalUnit possSuperiors: container # Class: apple-neighborhood dn: cn=apple-neighborhood,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: classSchema governsID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.2.20 ldapDisplayName: apple-neighborhood objectClassCategory: 1 # subclassOf: top subclassOf: 2.5.6.0 # rdnAttId: cn rdnAttId: 2.5.4.3 # mayContain: apple-category mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.10.4 # mayContain: apple-computeralias mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.20.3 # mayContain: apple-keyword mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.19 # mayContain: apple-neighborhoodalias mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.20.2 # mayContain: apple-nodepathxml mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.20.1 # mayContain: apple-xmlplist mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.17.1 # mayContain: ttl mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.250.1.60 possSuperiors: 2.5.6.5 possSuperiors: container # Class: apple-serverassistant-config dn: cn=apple-serverassistant-config,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: classSchema governsID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.2.17 ldapDisplayName: apple-serverassistant-config objectClassCategory: 1 # subclassOf: top subclassOf: 2.5.6.0 # rdnAttId: cn rdnAttId: 2.5.4.3 # mayContain: apple-xmlplist mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.17.1 possSuperiors: organizationalUnit possSuperiors: container # Class: apple-service dn: cn=apple-service,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: classSchema governsID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.2.19 ldapDisplayName: apple-service objectClassCategory: 1 # subclassOf: top subclassOf: 2.5.6.0 # rdnAttId: cn rdnAttId: 2.5.4.3 # mustContain: apple-service-type mustContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.1 # mayContain: apple-dnsname mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.4 # mayContain: apple-keyword mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.19 # mayContain: apple-service-location mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.5 # mayContain: apple-service-port mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.3 # mayContain: apple-service-url mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.19.2 # mayContain: ipHostNumber mayContain: 1.3.6.1.1.1.1.19 possSuperiors: organizationalUnit possSuperiors: container # Class: apple-user dn: cn=apple-user,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: classSchema governsID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.2.1 ldapDisplayName: apple-user adminDescription: apple user account objectClassCategory: 3 # subclassOf: top subclassOf: 2.5.6.0 # rdnAttId: cn rdnAttId: 2.5.4.3 # mayContain: apple-imhandle mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.21 # mayContain: apple-keyword mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.19 # mayContain: apple-mcxflags mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.10 # mayContain: apple-mcxsettings mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.16 # mayContain: apple-user-authenticationhint mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.15 # mayContain: apple-user-class mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.7 # mayContain: apple-user-homequota mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.8 # mayContain: apple-user-homesoftquota mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.17 # mayContain: apple-user-homeurl mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.6 # mayContain: apple-user-mailattribute mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.9 # mayContain: apple-user-picture mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.12 # mayContain: apple-user-printattribute mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.13 # mayContain: apple-webloguri mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.1.22 # Class: mount dn: cn=apple-mount,cn=Schema,cn=Configuration,dc=X changetype: ntdsschemaadd objectClass: classSchema governsID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.2.8 ldapDisplayName: mount objectClassCategory: 1 # subclassOf: top subclassOf: 2.5.6.0 # rdnAttId: cn rdnAttId: 2.5.4.3 # mayContain: mountDirectory mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.8.1 # mayContain: mountDumpFrequency mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.8.4 # mayContain: mountOption mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.8.3 # mayContain: mountPassNo mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.8.5 # mayContain: mountType mayContain: 1.3.6.1.4.1.63.1000.1.1.1.8.2 possSuperiors: 2.5.6.5 possSuperiors: container dn: changetype: modify add: schemaUpdateNow schemaUpdateNow: 1 - # ================================================================== # Updating present elements # ================================================================== # Add the new class to the user object dn: CN=User,CN=Schema,CN=Configuration,DC=X changetype: modify add: auxiliaryClass auxiliaryClass: apple-user - # Add the new class to the computer object dn: CN=Computer,CN=Schema,CN=Configuration,DC=X changetype: modify add: auxiliaryClass auxiliaryClass: apple-computer - # Add the new class to the group object dn: CN=Group,CN=Schema,CN=Configuration,DC=X changetype: modify add: auxiliaryClass auxiliaryClass: apple-group - # Add the new class to the configuration object dn: CN=Configuration,CN=Schema,CN=Configuration,DC=X changetype: modify add: auxiliaryClass auxiliaryClass: apple-configuration -

    Read the article

  • JMS Step 6 - How to Set Up an AQ JMS (Advanced Queueing JMS) for SOA Purposes

    - by John-Brown.Evans
    JMS Step 6 - How to Set Up an AQ JMS (Advanced Queueing JMS) for SOA Purposes .jblist{list-style-type:disc;margin:0;padding:0;padding-left:0pt;margin-left:36pt} ol{margin:0;padding:0} .c17_6{vertical-align:top;width:468pt;border-style:solid;border-color:#000000;border-width:1pt;padding:5pt 5pt 5pt 5pt} .c5_6{vertical-align:top;border-style:solid;border-color:#000000;border-width:1pt;padding:0pt 5pt 0pt 5pt} .c6_6{vertical-align:top;width:156pt;border-style:solid;border-color:#000000;border-width:1pt;padding:5pt 5pt 5pt 5pt} .c15_6{background-color:#ffffff} .c10_6{color:#1155cc;text-decoration:underline} .c1_6{text-align:center;direction:ltr} .c0_6{line-height:1.0;direction:ltr} .c16_6{color:#666666;font-size:12pt} .c18_6{color:inherit;text-decoration:inherit} .c8_6{background-color:#f3f3f3} .c2_6{direction:ltr} .c14_6{font-size:8pt} .c11_6{font-size:10pt} .c7_6{font-weight:bold} .c12_6{height:0pt} .c3_6{height:11pt} .c13_6{border-collapse:collapse} .c4_6{font-family:"Courier New"} .c9_6{font-style:italic} .title{padding-top:24pt;line-height:1.15;text-align:left;color:#000000;font-size:36pt;font-family:"Arial";font-weight:bold;padding-bottom:6pt} .subtitle{padding-top:18pt;line-height:1.15;text-align:left;color:#666666;font-style:italic;font-size:24pt;font-family:"Georgia";padding-bottom:4pt} li{color:#000000;font-size:10pt;font-family:"Arial"} p{color:#000000;font-size:10pt;margin:0;font-family:"Arial"} h1{padding-top:0pt;line-height:1.15;text-align:left;color:#888;font-size:24pt;font-family:"Arial";font-weight:normal} h2{padding-top:0pt;line-height:1.15;text-align:left;color:#888;font-size:18pt;font-family:"Arial";font-weight:normal} h3{padding-top:0pt;line-height:1.15;text-align:left;color:#888;font-size:14pt;font-family:"Arial";font-weight:normal} h4{padding-top:0pt;line-height:1.15;text-align:left;color:#888;font-size:12pt;font-family:"Arial";font-weight:normal} h5{padding-top:0pt;line-height:1.15;text-align:left;color:#888;font-size:11pt;font-family:"Arial";font-weight:normal} h6{padding-top:0pt;line-height:1.15;text-align:left;color:#888;font-size:10pt;font-family:"Arial";font-weight:normal} This post continues the series of JMS articles which demonstrate how to use JMS queues in a SOA context. The previous posts were: JMS Step 1 - How to Create a Simple JMS Queue in Weblogic Server 11g JMS Step 2 - Using the QueueSend.java Sample Program to Send a Message to a JMS Queue JMS Step 3 - Using the QueueReceive.java Sample Program to Read a Message from a JMS Queue JMS Step 4 - How to Create an 11g BPEL Process Which Writes a Message Based on an XML Schema to a JMS Queue JMS Step 5 - How to Create an 11g BPEL Process Which Reads a Message Based on an XML Schema from a JMS Queue This example leads you through the creation of an Oracle database Advanced Queue and the related WebLogic server objects in order to use AQ JMS in connection with a SOA composite. If you have not already done so, I recommend you look at the previous posts in this series, as they include steps which this example builds upon. The following examples will demonstrate how to write and read from the queue from a SOA process. 1. Recap and Prerequisites In the previous examples, we created a JMS Queue, a Connection Factory and a Connection Pool in the WebLogic Server Console. Then we wrote and deployed BPEL composites, which enqueued and dequeued a simple XML payload. AQ JMS allows you to interoperate with database Advanced Queueing via JMS in WebLogic server and therefore take advantage of database features, while maintaining compliance with the JMS architecture. AQ JMS uses the WebLogic JMS Foreign Server framework. A full description of this functionality can be found in the following Oracle documentation Oracle® Fusion Middleware Configuring and Managing JMS for Oracle WebLogic Server 11g Release 1 (10.3.6) Part Number E13738-06 7. Interoperating with Oracle AQ JMS http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E23943_01/web.1111/e13738/aq_jms.htm#CJACBCEJ For easier reference, this sample will use the same names for the objects as in the above document, except for the name of the database user, as it is possible that this user already exists in your database. We will create the following objects Database Objects Name Type AQJMSUSER Database User MyQueueTable Advanced Queue (AQ) Table UserQueue Advanced Queue WebLogic Server Objects Object Name Type JNDI Name aqjmsuserDataSource Data Source jdbc/aqjmsuserDataSource AqJmsModule JMS System Module AqJmsForeignServer JMS Foreign Server AqJmsForeignServerConnectionFactory JMS Foreign Server Connection Factory AqJmsForeignServerConnectionFactory AqJmsForeignDestination AQ JMS Foreign Destination queue/USERQUEUE eis/aqjms/UserQueue Connection Pool eis/aqjms/UserQueue 2. Create a Database User and Advanced Queue The following steps can be executed in the database client of your choice, e.g. JDeveloper or SQL Developer. The examples below use SQL*Plus. Log in to the database as a DBA user, for example SYSTEM or SYS. Create the AQJMSUSER user and grant privileges to enable the user to create AQ objects. Create Database User and Grant AQ Privileges sqlplus system/password as SYSDBA GRANT connect, resource TO aqjmsuser IDENTIFIED BY aqjmsuser; GRANT aq_user_role TO aqjmsuser; GRANT execute ON sys.dbms_aqadm TO aqjmsuser; GRANT execute ON sys.dbms_aq TO aqjmsuser; GRANT execute ON sys.dbms_aqin TO aqjmsuser; GRANT execute ON sys.dbms_aqjms TO aqjmsuser; Create the Queue Table and Advanced Queue and Start the AQ The following commands are executed as the aqjmsuser database user. Create the Queue Table connect aqjmsuser/aqjmsuser; BEGIN dbms_aqadm.create_queue_table ( queue_table = 'myQueueTable', queue_payload_type = 'sys.aq$_jms_text_message', multiple_consumers = false ); END; / Create the AQ BEGIN dbms_aqadm.create_queue ( queue_name = 'userQueue', queue_table = 'myQueueTable' ); END; / Start the AQ BEGIN dbms_aqadm.start_queue ( queue_name = 'userQueue'); END; / The above commands can be executed in a single PL/SQL block, but are shown as separate blocks in this example for ease of reference. You can verify the queue by executing the SQL command SELECT object_name, object_type FROM user_objects; which should display the following objects: OBJECT_NAME OBJECT_TYPE ------------------------------ ------------------- SYS_C0056513 INDEX SYS_LOB0000170822C00041$$ LOB SYS_LOB0000170822C00040$$ LOB SYS_LOB0000170822C00037$$ LOB AQ$_MYQUEUETABLE_T INDEX AQ$_MYQUEUETABLE_I INDEX AQ$_MYQUEUETABLE_E QUEUE AQ$_MYQUEUETABLE_F VIEW AQ$MYQUEUETABLE VIEW MYQUEUETABLE TABLE USERQUEUE QUEUE Similarly, you can view the objects in JDeveloper via a Database Connection to the AQJMSUSER. 3. Configure WebLogic Server and Add JMS Objects All these steps are executed from the WebLogic Server Administration Console. Log in as the webLogic user. Configure a WebLogic Data Source The data source is required for the database connection to the AQ created above. Navigate to domain > Services > Data Sources and press New then Generic Data Source. Use the values:Name: aqjmsuserDataSource JNDI Name: jdbc/aqjmsuserDataSource Database type: Oracle Database Driver: *Oracle’ Driver (Thin XA) for Instance connections; Versions:9.0.1 and later Connection Properties: Enter the connection information to the database containing the AQ created above and enter aqjmsuser for the User Name and Password. Press Test Configuration to verify the connection details and press Next. Target the data source to the soa server. The data source will be displayed in the list. It is a good idea to test the data source at this stage. Click on aqjmsuserDataSource, select Monitoring > Testing > soa_server1 and press Test Data Source. The result is displayed at the top of the page. Configure a JMS System Module The JMS system module is required to host the JMS foreign server for AQ resources. Navigate to Services > Messaging > JMS Modules and select New. Use the values: Name: AqJmsModule (Leave Descriptor File Name and Location in Domain empty.) Target: soa_server1 Click Finish. The other resources will be created in separate steps. The module will be displayed in the list.   Configure a JMS Foreign Server A foreign server is required in order to reference a 3rd-party JMS provider, in this case the database AQ, within a local WebLogic server JNDI tree. Navigate to Services > Messaging > JMS Modules and select (click on) AqJmsModule to configure it. Under Summary of Resources, select New then Foreign Server. Name: AqJmsForeignServer Targets: The foreign server is targeted automatically to soa_server1, based on the JMS module’s target. Press Finish to create the foreign server. The foreign server resource will be listed in the Summary of Resources for the AqJmsModule, but needs additional configuration steps. Click on AqJmsForeignServer and select Configuration > General to complete the configuration: JNDI Initial Context Factory: oracle.jms.AQjmsInitialContextFactory JNDI Connection URL: <empty> JNDI Properties Credential:<empty> Confirm JNDI Properties Credential: <empty> JNDI Properties: datasource=jdbc/aqjmsuserDataSource This is an important property. It is the JNDI name of the data source created above, which points to the AQ schema in the database and must be entered as a name=value pair, as in this example, e.g. datasource=jdbc/aqjmsuserDataSource, including the “datasource=” property name. Default Targeting Enabled: Leave this value checked. Press Save to save the configuration. At this point it is a good idea to verify that the data source was written correctly to the config file. In a terminal window, navigate to $MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/domains/soa_domain/config/jms  and open the file aqjmsmodule-jms.xml . The foreign server configuration should contain the datasource name-value pair, as follows:   <foreign-server name="AqJmsForeignServer">         <default-targeting-enabled>true</default-targeting-enabled>         <initial-context-factory>oracle.jms.AQjmsInitialContextFactory</initial-context-factory>         <jndi-property>           <key> datasource </key>           <value> jdbc/aqjmsuserDataSource </value>         </jndi-property>   </foreign-server> </weblogic-jms> Configure a JMS Foreign Server Connection Factory When creating the foreign server connection factory, you enter local and remote JNDI names. The name of the connection factory itself and the local JNDI name are arbitrary, but the remote JNDI name must match a specific format, depending on the type of queue or topic to be accessed in the database. This is very important and if the incorrect value is used, the connection to the queue will not be established and the error messages you get will not immediately reflect the cause of the error. The formats required (Remote JNDI names for AQ JMS Connection Factories) are described in the section Configure AQ Destinations  of the Oracle® Fusion Middleware Configuring and Managing JMS for Oracle WebLogic Server document mentioned earlier. In this example, the remote JNDI name used is   XAQueueConnectionFactory  because it matches the AQ and data source created earlier, i.e. thin with AQ. Navigate to JMS Modules > AqJmsModule > AqJmsForeignServer > Connection Factories then New.Name: AqJmsForeignServerConnectionFactory Local JNDI Name: AqJmsForeignServerConnectionFactory Note: this local JNDI name is the JNDI name which your client application, e.g. a later BPEL process, will use to access this connection factory. Remote JNDI Name: XAQueueConnectionFactory Press OK to save the configuration. Configure an AQ JMS Foreign Server Destination A foreign server destination maps the JNDI name on the foreign JNDI provider to the respective local JNDI name, allowing the foreign JNDI name to be accessed via the local server. As with the foreign server connection factory, the local JNDI name is arbitrary (but must be unique), but the remote JNDI name must conform to a specific format defined in the section Configure AQ Destinations  of the Oracle® Fusion Middleware Configuring and Managing JMS for Oracle WebLogic Server document mentioned earlier. In our example, the remote JNDI name is Queues/USERQUEUE , because it references a queue (as opposed to a topic) with the name USERQUEUE. We will name the local JNDI name queue/USERQUEUE, which is a little confusing (note the missing “s” in “queue), but conforms better to the JNDI nomenclature in our SOA server and also allows us to differentiate between the local and remote names for demonstration purposes. Navigate to JMS Modules > AqJmsModule > AqJmsForeignServer > Destinations and select New.Name: AqJmsForeignDestination Local JNDI Name: queue/USERQUEUE Remote JNDI Name:Queues/USERQUEUE After saving the foreign destination configuration, this completes the JMS part of the configuration. We still need to configure the JMS adapter in order to be able to access the queue from a BPEL processt. 4. Create a JMS Adapter Connection Pool in Weblogic Server Create the Connection Pool Access to the AQ JMS queue from a BPEL or other SOA process in our example is done via a JMS adapter. To enable this, the JmsAdapter in WebLogic server needs to be configured to have a connection pool which points to the local connection factory JNDI name which was created earlier. Navigate to Deployments > Next and select (click on) the JmsAdapter. Select Configuration > Outbound Connection Pools and New. Check the radio button for oracle.tip.adapter.jms.IJmsConnectionFactory and press Next. JNDI Name: eis/aqjms/UserQueue Press Finish Expand oracle.tip.adapter.jms.IJmsConnectionFactory and click on eis/aqjms/UserQueue to configure it. The ConnectionFactoryLocation must point to the foreign server’s local connection factory name created earlier. In our example, this is AqJmsForeignServerConnectionFactory . As a reminder, this connection factory is located under JMS Modules > AqJmsModule > AqJmsForeignServer > Connection Factories and the value needed here is under Local JNDI Name. Enter AqJmsForeignServerConnectionFactory  into the Property Value field for ConnectionFactoryLocation. You must then press Return/Enter then Save for the value to be accepted. If your WebLogic server is running in Development mode, you should see the message that the changes have been activated and the deployment plan successfully updated. If not, then you will manually need to activate the changes in the WebLogic server console.Although the changes have been activated, the JmsAdapter needs to be redeployed in order for the changes to become effective. This should be confirmed by the message Remember to update your deployment to reflect the new plan when you are finished with your changes. Redeploy the JmsAdapter Navigate back to the Deployments screen, either by selecting it in the left-hand navigation tree or by selecting the “Summary of Deployments” link in the breadcrumbs list at the top of the screen. Then select the checkbox next to JmsAdapter and press the Update button. On the Update Application Assistant page, select “Redeploy this application using the following deployment files” and press Finish. After a few seconds you should get the message that the selected deployments were updated. The JMS adapter configuration is complete and it can now be used to access the AQ JMS queue. You can verify that the JNDI name was created correctly, by navigating to Environment > Servers > soa_server1 and View JNDI Tree. Then scroll down in the JNDI Tree Structure to eis and select aqjms. This concludes the sample. In the following post, I will show you how to create a BPEL process which sends a message to this advanced queue via JMS. Best regards John-Brown Evans Oracle Technology Proactive Support Delivery

    Read the article

  • Windows Azure: Backup Services Release, Hyper-V Recovery Manager, VM Enhancements, Enhanced Enterprise Management Support

    - by ScottGu
    This morning we released a huge set of updates to Windows Azure.  These new capabilities include: Backup Services: General Availability of Windows Azure Backup Services Hyper-V Recovery Manager: Public preview of Windows Azure Hyper-V Recovery Manager Virtual Machines: Delete Attached Disks, Availability Set Warnings, SQL AlwaysOn Configuration Active Directory: Securely manage hundreds of SaaS applications Enterprise Management: Use Active Directory to Better Manage Windows Azure Windows Azure SDK 2.2: A massive update of our SDK + Visual Studio tooling support All of these improvements are now available to use immediately.  Below are more details about them. Backup Service: General Availability Release of Windows Azure Backup Today we are releasing Windows Azure Backup Service as a general availability service.  This release is now live in production, backed by an enterprise SLA, supported by Microsoft Support, and is ready to use for production scenarios. Windows Azure Backup is a cloud based backup solution for Windows Server which allows files and folders to be backed up and recovered from the cloud, and provides off-site protection against data loss. The service provides IT administrators and developers with the option to back up and protect critical data in an easily recoverable way from any location with no upfront hardware cost. Windows Azure Backup is built on the Windows Azure platform and uses Windows Azure blob storage for storing customer data. Windows Server uses the downloadable Windows Azure Backup Agent to transfer file and folder data securely and efficiently to the Windows Azure Backup Service. Along with providing cloud backup for Windows Server, Windows Azure Backup Service also provides capability to backup data from System Center Data Protection Manager and Windows Server Essentials, to the cloud. All data is encrypted onsite before it is sent to the cloud, and customers retain and manage the encryption key (meaning the data is stored entirely secured and can’t be decrypted by anyone but yourself). Getting Started To get started with the Windows Azure Backup Service, create a new Backup Vault within the Windows Azure Management Portal.  Click New->Data Services->Recovery Services->Backup Vault to do this: Once the backup vault is created you’ll be presented with a simple tutorial that will help guide you on how to register your Windows Servers with it: Once the servers you want to backup are registered, you can use the appropriate local management interface (such as the Microsoft Management Console snap-in, System Center Data Protection Manager Console, or Windows Server Essentials Dashboard) to configure the scheduled backups and to optionally initiate recoveries. You can follow these tutorials to learn more about how to do this: Tutorial: Schedule Backups Using the Windows Azure Backup Agent This tutorial helps you with setting up a backup schedule for your registered Windows Servers. Additionally, it also explains how to use Windows PowerShell cmdlets to set up a custom backup schedule. Tutorial: Recover Files and Folders Using the Windows Azure Backup Agent This tutorial helps you with recovering data from a backup. Additionally, it also explains how to use Windows PowerShell cmdlets to do the same tasks. Below are some of the key benefits the Windows Azure Backup Service provides: Simple configuration and management. Windows Azure Backup Service integrates with the familiar Windows Server Backup utility in Windows Server, the Data Protection Manager component in System Center and Windows Server Essentials, in order to provide a seamless backup and recovery experience to a local disk, or to the cloud. Block level incremental backups. The Windows Azure Backup Agent performs incremental backups by tracking file and block level changes and only transferring the changed blocks, hence reducing the storage and bandwidth utilization. Different point-in-time versions of the backups use storage efficiently by only storing the changes blocks between these versions. Data compression, encryption and throttling. The Windows Azure Backup Agent ensures that data is compressed and encrypted on the server before being sent to the Windows Azure Backup Service over the network. As a result, the Windows Azure Backup Service only stores encrypted data in the cloud storage. The encryption key is not available to the Windows Azure Backup Service, and as a result the data is never decrypted in the service. Also, users can setup throttling and configure how the Windows Azure Backup service utilizes the network bandwidth when backing up or restoring information. Data integrity is verified in the cloud. In addition to the secure backups, the backed up data is also automatically checked for integrity once the backup is done. As a result, any corruptions which may arise due to data transfer can be easily identified and are fixed automatically. Configurable retention policies for storing data in the cloud. The Windows Azure Backup Service accepts and implements retention policies to recycle backups that exceed the desired retention range, thereby meeting business policies and managing backup costs. Hyper-V Recovery Manager: Now Available in Public Preview I’m excited to also announce the public preview of a new Windows Azure Service – the Windows Azure Hyper-V Recovery Manager (HRM). Windows Azure Hyper-V Recovery Manager helps protect your business critical services by coordinating the replication and recovery of System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2012 SP1 and System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2012 R2 private clouds at a secondary location. With automated protection, asynchronous ongoing replication, and orderly recovery, the Hyper-V Recovery Manager service can help you implement Disaster Recovery and restore important services accurately, consistently, and with minimal downtime. Application data in an Hyper-V Recovery Manager scenarios always travels on your on-premise replication channel. Only metadata (such as names of logical clouds, virtual machines, networks etc.) that is needed for orchestration is sent to Azure. All traffic sent to/from Azure is encrypted. You can begin using Windows Azure Hyper-V Recovery today by clicking New->Data Services->Recovery Services->Hyper-V Recovery Manager within the Windows Azure Management Portal.  You can read more about Windows Azure Hyper-V Recovery Manager in Brad Anderson’s 9-part series, Transform the datacenter. To learn more about setting up Hyper-V Recovery Manager follow our detailed step-by-step guide. Virtual Machines: Delete Attached Disks, Availability Set Warnings, SQL AlwaysOn Today’s Windows Azure release includes a number of nice updates to Windows Azure Virtual Machines.  These improvements include: Ability to Delete both VM Instances + Attached Disks in One Operation Prior to today’s release, when you deleted VMs within Windows Azure we would delete the VM instance – but not delete the drives attached to the VM.  You had to manually delete these yourself from the storage account.  With today’s update we’ve added a convenience option that now allows you to either retain or delete the attached disks when you delete the VM:   We’ve also added the ability to delete a cloud service, its deployments, and its role instances with a single action. This can either be a cloud service that has production and staging deployments with web and worker roles, or a cloud service that contains virtual machines.  To do this, simply select the Cloud Service within the Windows Azure Management Portal and click the “Delete” button: Warnings on Availability Sets with Only One Virtual Machine In Them One of the nice features that Windows Azure Virtual Machines supports is the concept of “Availability Sets”.  An “availability set” allows you to define a tier/role (e.g. webfrontends, databaseservers, etc) that you can map Virtual Machines into – and when you do this Windows Azure separates them across fault domains and ensures that at least one of them is always available during servicing operations.  This enables you to deploy applications in a high availability way. One issue we’ve seen some customers run into is where they define an availability set, but then forget to map more than one VM into it (which defeats the purpose of having an availability set).  With today’s release we now display a warning in the Windows Azure Management Portal if you have only one virtual machine deployed in an availability set to help highlight this: You can learn more about configuring the availability of your virtual machines here. Configuring SQL Server Always On SQL Server Always On is a great feature that you can use with Windows Azure to enable high availability and DR scenarios with SQL Server. Today’s Windows Azure release makes it even easier to configure SQL Server Always On by enabling “Direct Server Return” endpoints to be configured and managed within the Windows Azure Management Portal.  Previously, setting this up required using PowerShell to complete the endpoint configuration.  Starting today you can enable this simply by checking the “Direct Server Return” checkbox: You can learn more about how to use direct server return for SQL Server AlwaysOn availability groups here. Active Directory: Application Access Enhancements This summer we released our initial preview of our Application Access Enhancements for Windows Azure Active Directory.  This service enables you to securely implement single-sign-on (SSO) support against SaaS applications (including Office 365, SalesForce, Workday, Box, Google Apps, GitHub, etc) as well as LOB based applications (including ones built with the new Windows Azure AD support we shipped last week with ASP.NET and VS 2013). Since the initial preview we’ve enhanced our SAML federation capabilities, integrated our new password vaulting system, and shipped multi-factor authentication support. We've also turned on our outbound identity provisioning system and have it working with hundreds of additional SaaS Applications: Earlier this month we published an update on dates and pricing for when the service will be released in general availability form.  In this blog post we announced our intention to release the service in general availability form by the end of the year.  We also announced that the below features would be available in a free tier with it: SSO to every SaaS app we integrate with – Users can Single Sign On to any app we are integrated with at no charge. This includes all the top SAAS Apps and every app in our application gallery whether they use federation or password vaulting. Application access assignment and removal – IT Admins can assign access privileges to web applications to the users in their active directory assuring that every employee has access to the SAAS Apps they need. And when a user leaves the company or changes jobs, the admin can just as easily remove their access privileges assuring data security and minimizing IP loss User provisioning (and de-provisioning) – IT admins will be able to automatically provision users in 3rd party SaaS applications like Box, Salesforce.com, GoToMeeting, DropBox and others. We are working with key partners in the ecosystem to establish these connections, meaning you no longer have to continually update user records in multiple systems. Security and auditing reports – Security is a key priority for us. With the free version of these enhancements you'll get access to our standard set of access reports giving you visibility into which users are using which applications, when they were using them and where they are using them from. In addition, we'll alert you to un-usual usage patterns for instance when a user logs in from multiple locations at the same time. Our Application Access Panel – Users are logging in from every type of devices including Windows, iOS, & Android. Not all of these devices handle authentication in the same manner but the user doesn't care. They need to access their apps from the devices they love. Our Application Access Panel will support the ability for users to access access and launch their apps from any device and anywhere. You can learn more about our plans for application management with Windows Azure Active Directory here.  Try out the preview and start using it today. Enterprise Management: Use Active Directory to Better Manage Windows Azure Windows Azure Active Directory provides the ability to manage your organization in a directory which is hosted entirely in the cloud, or alternatively kept in sync with an on-premises Windows Server Active Directory solution (allowing you to seamlessly integrate with the directory you already have).  With today’s Windows Azure release we are integrating Windows Azure Active Directory even more within the core Windows Azure management experience, and enabling an even richer enterprise security offering.  Specifically: 1) All Windows Azure accounts now have a default Windows Azure Active Directory created for them.  You can create and map any users you want into this directory, and grant administrative rights to manage resources in Windows Azure to these users. 2) You can keep this directory entirely hosted in the cloud – or optionally sync it with your on-premises Windows Server Active Directory.  Both options are free.  The later approach is ideal for companies that wish to use their corporate user identities to sign-in and manage Windows Azure resources.  It also ensures that if an employee leaves an organization, his or her access control rights to the company’s Windows Azure resources are immediately revoked. 3) The Windows Azure Service Management APIs have been updated to support using Windows Azure Active Directory credentials to sign-in and perform management operations.  Prior to today’s release customers had to download and use management certificates (which were not scoped to individual users) to perform management operations.  We still support this management certificate approach (don’t worry – nothing will stop working).  But we think the new Windows Azure Active Directory authentication support enables an even easier and more secure way for customers to manage resources going forward.  4) The Windows Azure SDK 2.2 release (which is also shipping today) includes built-in support for the new Service Management APIs that authenticate with Windows Azure Active Directory, and now allow you to create and manage Windows Azure applications and resources directly within Visual Studio using your Active Directory credentials.  This, combined with updated PowerShell scripts that also support Active Directory, enables an end-to-end enterprise authentication story with Windows Azure. Below are some details on how all of this works: Subscriptions within a Directory As part of today’s update, we have associated all existing Window Azure accounts with a Windows Azure Active Directory (and created one for you if you don’t already have one). When you login to the Windows Azure Management Portal you’ll now see the directory name in the URI of the browser.  For example, in the screen-shot below you can see that I have a “scottgu” directory that my subscriptions are hosted within: Note that you can continue to use Microsoft Accounts (formerly known as Microsoft Live IDs) to sign-into Windows Azure.  These map just fine to a Windows Azure Active Directory – so there is no need to create new usernames that are specific to a directory if you don’t want to.  In the scenario above I’m actually logged in using my @hotmail.com based Microsoft ID which is now mapped to a “scottgu” active directory that was created for me.  By default everything will continue to work just like you used to before. Manage your Directory You can manage an Active Directory (including the one we now create for you by default) by clicking the “Active Directory” tab in the left-hand side of the portal.  This will list all of the directories in your account.  Clicking one the first time will display a getting started page that provides documentation and links to perform common tasks with it: You can use the built-in directory management support within the Windows Azure Management Portal to add/remove/manage users within the directory, enable multi-factor authentication, associate a custom domain (e.g. mycompanyname.com) with the directory, and/or rename the directory to whatever friendly name you want (just click the configure tab to do this).  You can also setup the directory to automatically sync with an on-premises Active Directory using the “Directory Integration” tab. Note that users within a directory by default do not have admin rights to login or manage Windows Azure based resources.  You still need to explicitly grant them co-admin permissions on a subscription for them to login or manage resources in Windows Azure.  You can do this by clicking the Settings tab on the left-hand side of the portal and then by clicking the administrators tab within it. Sign-In Integration within Visual Studio If you install the new Windows Azure SDK 2.2 release, you can now connect to Windows Azure from directly inside Visual Studio without having to download any management certificates.  You can now just right-click on the “Windows Azure” icon within the Server Explorer and choose the “Connect to Windows Azure” context menu option to do so: Doing this will prompt you to enter the email address of the username you wish to sign-in with (make sure this account is a user in your directory with co-admin rights on a subscription): You can use either a Microsoft Account (e.g. Windows Live ID) or an Active Directory based Organizational account as the email.  The dialog will update with an appropriate login prompt depending on which type of email address you enter: Once you sign-in you’ll see the Windows Azure resources that you have permissions to manage show up automatically within the Visual Studio server explorer and be available to start using: No downloading of management certificates required.  All of the authentication was handled using your Windows Azure Active Directory! Manage Subscriptions across Multiple Directories If you have already have multiple directories and multiple subscriptions within your Windows Azure account, we have done our best to create a good default mapping of your subscriptions->directories as part of today’s update.  If you don’t like the default subscription-to-directory mapping we have done you can click the Settings tab in the left-hand navigation of the Windows Azure Management Portal and browse to the Subscriptions tab within it: If you want to map a subscription under a different directory in your account, simply select the subscription from the list, and then click the “Edit Directory” button to choose which directory to map it to.  Mapping a subscription to a different directory takes only seconds and will not cause any of the resources within the subscription to recycle or stop working.  We’ve made the directory->subscription mapping process self-service so that you always have complete control and can map things however you want. Filtering By Directory and Subscription Within the Windows Azure Management Portal you can filter resources in the portal by subscription (allowing you to show/hide different subscriptions).  If you have subscriptions mapped to multiple directory tenants, we also now have a filter drop-down that allows you to filter the subscription list by directory tenant.  This filter is only available if you have multiple subscriptions mapped to multiple directories within your Windows Azure Account:   Windows Azure SDK 2.2 Today we are also releasing a major update of our Windows Azure SDK.  The Windows Azure SDK 2.2 release adds some great new features including: Visual Studio 2013 Support Integrated Windows Azure Sign-In support within Visual Studio Remote Debugging Cloud Services with Visual Studio Firewall Management support within Visual Studio for SQL Databases Visual Studio 2013 RTM VM Images for MSDN Subscribers Windows Azure Management Libraries for .NET Updated Windows Azure PowerShell Cmdlets and ScriptCenter I’ll post a follow-up blog shortly with more details about all of the above. Additional Updates In addition to the above enhancements, today’s release also includes a number of additional improvements: AutoScale: Richer time and date based scheduling support (set different rules on different dates) AutoScale: Ability to Scale to Zero Virtual Machines (very useful for Dev/Test scenarios) AutoScale: Support for time-based scheduling of Mobile Service AutoScale rules Operation Logs: Auditing support for Service Bus management operations Today we also shipped a major update to the Windows Azure SDK – Windows Azure SDK 2.2.  It has so much goodness in it that I have a whole second blog post coming shortly on it! :-) Summary Today’s Windows Azure release enables a bunch of great new scenarios, and enables a much richer enterprise authentication offering. If you don’t already have a Windows Azure account, you can sign-up for a free trial and start using all of the above features today.  Then visit the Windows Azure Developer Center to learn more about how to build apps with it. Hope this helps, Scott P.S. In addition to blogging, I am also now using Twitter for quick updates and to share links. Follow me at: twitter.com/scottgu

    Read the article

  • Oracle Support Master Note for Troubleshooting Advanced Queuing and Oracle Streams Propagation Issues (Doc ID 233099.1)

    - by faye.todd(at)oracle.com
    Master Note for Troubleshooting Advanced Queuing and Oracle Streams Propagation Issues (Doc ID 233099.1) Copyright (c) 2010, Oracle Corporation. All Rights Reserved. In this Document  Purpose  Last Review Date  Instructions for the Reader  Troubleshooting Details     1. Scope and Application      2. Definitions and Classifications     3. How to Use This Guide     4. Basic AQ Propagation Troubleshooting     5. Additional Troubleshooting Steps for AQ Propagation of User-Enqueued and Dequeued Messages     6. Additional Troubleshooting Steps for Propagation in an Oracle Streams Environment     7. Performance Issues  References Applies to: Oracle Server - Enterprise Edition - Version: 8.1.7.0 to 11.2.0.2 - Release: 8.1.7 to 11.2Information in this document applies to any platform. Purpose This document presents a step-by-step methodology for troubleshooting and resolving problems with Advanced Queuing Propagation in both Streams and basic Advanced Queuing environments. It also serves as a master reference for other more specific notes on Oracle Streams Propagation and Advanced Queuing Propagation issues. Last Review Date December 20, 2010 Instructions for the Reader A Troubleshooting Guide is provided to assist in debugging a specific issue. When possible, diagnostic tools are included in the document to assist in troubleshooting. Troubleshooting Details 1. Scope and Application This note is intended for Database Administrators of Oracle databases where issues are being encountered with propagating messages between advanced queues, whether the queues are used for user-created messaging systems or for Oracle Streams. It contains troubleshooting steps and links to notes for further problem resolution.It can also be used a template to document a problem when it is necessary to engage Oracle Support Services. Knowing what is NOT happening can frequently speed up the resolution process by focusing solely on the pertinent problem area. This guide is divided into five parts: Section 2: Definitions and Classifications (discusses the different types and features of propagations possible - helpful for understanding the rest of the guide) Section 3: How to Use this Guide (to be used as a start part for determining the scope of the problem and what sections to consult) Section 4. Basic AQ propagation troubleshooting (applies to both AQ propagation of user enqueued and dequeued messages as well as Oracle Streams propagations) Section 5. Additional troubleshooting steps for AQ propagation of user enqueued and dequeued messages Section 6. Additional troubleshooting steps for Oracle Streams propagation Section 7. Performance issues 2. Definitions and Classifications Given the potential scope of issues that can be encountered with AQ propagation, the first recommended step is to do some basic diagnosis to determine the type of problem that is being encountered. 2.1. What Type of Propagation is Being Used? 2.1.1. Buffered Messaging For an advanced queue, messages can be maintained on disk (persistent messaging) or in memory (buffered messaging). To determine if a queue is buffered or not, reference the GV_$BUFFERED_QUEUES view. If the queue does not appear in this view, it is persistent. 2.1.2. Propagation mode - queue-to-dblink vs queue-to-queue As of 10.2, an AQ propagation can also be defined as queue-to-dblink, or queue-to-queue: queue-to-dblink: The propagation delivers messages or events from the source queue to all subscribing queues at the destination database identified by the dblink. A single propagation schedule is used to propagate messages to all subscribing queues. Hence any changes made to this schedule will affect message delivery to all the subscribing queues. This mode does not support multiple propagations from the same source queue to the same target database. queue-to-queue: Added in 10.2, this propagation mode delivers messages or events from the source queue to a specific destination queue identified on the database link. This allows the user to have fine-grained control on the propagation schedule for message delivery. This new propagation mode also supports transparent failover when propagating to a destination Oracle RAC system. With queue-to-queue propagation, you are no longer required to re-point a database link if the owner instance of the queue fails on Oracle RAC. This mode supports multiple propagations to the same target database if the target queues are different. The default is queue-to-dblink. To verify if queue-to-queue propagation is being used, in non-Streams environments query DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES.DESTINATION - if a remote queue is listed along with the remote database link, then queue-to-queue propagation is being used. For Streams environments, the DBA_PROPAGATION.QUEUE_TO_QUEUE column can be checked.See the following note for a method to switch between the two modes:Document 827473.1 How to alter propagation from queue-to-queue to queue-to-dblink 2.1.3. Combined Capture and Apply (CCA) for Streams In 11g Oracle Streams environments, an optimization called Combined Capture and Apply (CCA) is implemented by default when possible. Although a propagation is configured in this case, Streams does not use it; instead it passes information directly from capture to an apply receiver. To see if CCA is in use: COLUMN CAPTURE_NAME HEADING 'Capture Name' FORMAT A30COLUMN OPTIMIZATION HEADING 'CCA Mode?' FORMAT A10SELECT CAPTURE_NAME, DECODE(OPTIMIZATION,0, 'No','Yes') OPTIMIZATIONFROM V$STREAMS_CAPTURE; Also, see the following note:Document 463820.1 Streams Combined Capture and Apply in 11g 2.2. Queue Table Compatibility There are three types of queue table compatibility. In more recent databases, queue tables may be present in all three modes of compatibility: 8.0 - earliest version, deprecated in 10.2 onwards 8.1 - support added for RAC, asynchronous notification, secure queues, queue level access control, rule-based subscribers, separate storage of history information 10.0 - if the database is in 10.1-compatible mode, then the default value for queue table compatibility is 10.0 2.3. Single vs Multiple Consumer Queue Tables If more than one recipient can dequeue a message from a queue, then its queue table is multiple consumer. You can propagate messages from a multiple-consumer queue to a single-consumer queue. Propagation from a single-consumer queue to a multiple-consumer queue is not possible. 3. How to Use This Guide 3.1. Are Messages Being Propagated at All, or is the Propagation Just Slow? Run the following query on the source database for the propagation (assuming that it is running): select TOTAL_NUMBER from DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES where QNAME='<source_queue_name>'; If TOTAL_NUMBER is increasing, then propagation is most likely functioning, although it may be slow. For performance issues, see Section 7. 3.2. Propagation Between Persistent User-Created Queues See Sections 4 and 5 (and optionally Section 6 if performance is an issue). 3.3. Propagation Between Buffered User-Created Queues See Sections 4, 5, and 6 (and optionally Section 7 if performance is an issue). 3.4. Propagation between Oracle Streams Queues (without Combined Capture and Apply (CCA) Optimization) See Sections 4 and 6 (and optionally Section 7 if performance is an issue). 3.5. Propagation between Oracle Streams Queues (with Combined Capture and Apply (CCA) Optimization) Although an AQ propagation is not used directly in this case, some characteristics of the message transfer are inferred from the propagation parameters used. Some parts of Sections 4 and 6 still apply. 3.6. Messaging Gateway Propagations This note does not apply to Messaging Gateway propagations. 4. Basic AQ Propagation Troubleshooting 4.1. Double-check Your Code Make sure that you are consistent in your usage of the database link(s) names, queue names, etc. It may be useful to plot a diagram of which queues are connected via which database links to make sure that the logical structure is correct. 4.2. Verify that Job Queue Processes are Running 4.2.1. Versions 10.2 and Lower - DBA_JOBS Package For versions 10.2 and lower, a scheduled propagation is managed by DBMS_JOB package. The propagation is performed by job queue process background processes. Therefore we need to verify that there are sufficient processes available for the propagation process. We should have at least 4 job queue processes running and preferably more depending on the number of other jobs running in the database. It should be noted that for AQ specific work, AQ will only ever use half of the job queue processes available.An issue caused by an inadequate job queue processes parameter setting is described in the following note:Document 298015.1 Kwqjswproc:Excep After Loop: Assigning To Self 4.2.1.1. Job Queue Processes in Initalization Parameter File The parameter JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES in the init.ora/spfile should be > 0. The value can be changed dynamically via connect / as sysdbaalter system set JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES=10; 4.2.1.2. Job Queue Processes in Memory The following command will show how many job queue processes are currentlyin use by this instance (this may be different than what is in the init.ora/spfile): connect / as sysdbashow parameter job; 4.2.1.3. OS PIDs Corresponding to Job Queue Processes Identify the operating system process ids (spids) of job queue processes involved in propagation via select p.SPID, p.PROGRAM from V$PROCESS p, DBA_JOBS_RUNNING jr, V$SESSION s, DBA_JOBS j where s.SID=jr.SID and s.PADDR=p.ADDR and jr.JOB=j.JOBand j.WHAT like '%sys.dbms_aqadm.aq$_propaq(job)%'; and these SPIDs can be used to check at the operating system level that they exist.In 8i a job queue process will have a name similar to: ora_snp1_<instance_name>.In 9i onwards you will see a coordinator process: ora_cjq0_ and multiple slave processes: ora_jnnn_<instance_name>, where nnn is an integer between 1 and 999. 4.2.2. Version 11.1 and Above - Oracle Scheduler In version 11.1 and above, Oracle Scheduler is used to perform AQ and Streams propagations. Oracle Scheduler automatically tunes the number of slave processes for these jobs based on the load on the computer system, and the JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES initialization parameter is only used to specify the maximum number of slave processes. Therefore, the JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES initialization parameter does not need to be set (it defaults to a very high number), unless you want to limit the number of slaves that can be created. If JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES = 0, no propagation jobs will run.See the following note for a discussion of Oracle Streams 11g and Oracle Scheduler:Document 1083608.1 11g Streams and Oracle Scheduler 4.2.2.1. Job Queue Processes in Initalization Parameter File The parameter JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES in the init.ora/spfile should be > 0, and preferably be left at its default value. The value can be changed dynamically via connect / as sysdbaalter system set JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES=10; To set the JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES parameter to its default value, run: connect / as sysdbaalter system reset JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES; and then bounce the instance. 4.2.2.2. Job Queue Processes in Memory The following command will show how many job queue processes are currently in use by this instance (this may be different than what is in the init.ora/spfile): connect / as sysdbashow parameter job; 4.2.2.3. OS PIDs Corresponding to Job Queue Processes Identify the operating system process ids (SPIDs) of job queue processes involved in propagation via col PROGRAM for a30select p.SPID, p.PROGRAM, j.JOB_namefrom v$PROCESS p, DBA_SCHEDULER_RUNNING_JOBS jr, V$SESSION s, DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBS j where s.SID=jr.SESSION_ID and s.PADDR=p.ADDRand jr.JOB_name=j.JOB_NAME and j.JOB_NAME like '%AQ_JOB$_%'; and these SPIDs can be used to check at the operating system level that they exist.You will see a coordinator process: ora_cjq0_ and multiple slave processes: ora_jnnn_<instance_name>, where nnn is an integer between 1 and 999. 4.3. Check the Alert Log and Any Associated Trace Files The first place to check for propagation failures is the alert logs at all sites (local and if relevant all remote sites). When a job queue process attempts to execute a schedule and fails it will always write an error stack to the alert log. This error stack will also be written in a job queue process trace file, which will be written to the BACKGROUND_DUMP_DEST location for 10.2 and below, and in the DIAGNOSTIC_DEST location for 11g. The fact that errors are written to the alert log demonstrates that the schedule is executing. This means that the problem could be with the set up of the schedule. In this example the ORA-02068 demonstrates that the failure was at the remote site. Further investigation revealed that the remote database was not open, hence the ORA-03114 error. Starting the database resolved the problem. Thu Feb 14 10:40:05 2002 Propagation Schedule for (AQADM.MULTIPLEQ, SHANE816.WORLD) encountered following error:ORA-04052: error occurred when looking up Remote object [email protected]: error occurred at recursive SQL level 4ORA-02068: following severe error from SHANE816ORA-03114: not connected to ORACLEORA-06512: at "SYS.DBMS_AQADM_SYS", line 4770ORA-06512: at "SYS.DBMS_AQADM", line 548ORA-06512: at line 1 Other potential errors that may be written to the alert log can be found in the following notes:Document 827184.1 AQ Propagation with CLOB data types Fails with ORA-22990 (11.1)Document 846297.1 AQ Propagation Fails : ORA-00600[kope2upic2954] or Ora-00600[Kghsstream_copyn] (10.2, 11.1)Document 731292.1 ORA-25215 Reported on Local Propagation When Using Transformation with ANYDATA queue tables (10.2, 11.1, 11.2)Document 365093.1 ORA-07445 [kwqppay2aqe()+7360] Reported on Propagation of a Transformed Message (10.1, 10.2)Document 219416.1 Advanced Queuing Propagation Fails with ORA-22922 (9.0)Document 1203544.1 AQ Propagation Aborted with ORA-600 [ociksin: invalid status] on SYS.DBMS_AQADM_SYS.AQ$_PROPAGATION_PROCEDURE After Upgrade (11.1, 11.2)Document 1087324.1 ORA-01405 ORA-01422 reported by Advanced Queuing Propagation schedules after RAC reconfiguration (10.2)Document 1079577.1 Advanced Queuing Propagation Fails With "ORA-22370 incorrect usage of method" (9.2, 10.2, 11.1, 11.2)Document 332792.1 ORA-04061 error relating to SYS.DBMS_PRVTAQIP reported when setting up Statspack (8.1, 9.0, 9.2, 10.1)Document 353325.1 ORA-24056: Internal inconsistency for QUEUE <queue_name> and destination <dblink> (8.1, 9.0, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2, 11.1, 11.2)Document 787367.1 ORA-22275 reported on Propagating Messages with LOB component when propagating between 10.1 and 10.2 (10.1, 10.2)Document 566622.1 ORA-22275 when propagating >4K AQ$_JMS_TEXT_MESSAGEs from 9.2.0.8 to 10.2.0.1 (9.2, 10.1)Document 731539.1 ORA-29268: HTTP client error 401 Unauthorized Error when the AQ Servlet attempts to Propagate a message via HTTP (9.0, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2, 11.1)Document 253131.1 Concurrent Writes May Corrupt LOB Segment When Using Auto Segment Space Management (ORA-1555) (9.2)Document 118884.1 How to unschedule a propagation schedule stuck in pending stateDocument 222992.1 DBMS_AQADM.DISABLE_PROPAGATION_SCHEDULE Returns ORA-24082Document 282987.1 Propagated Messages marked UNDELIVERABLE after Drop and Recreate Of Remote QueueDocument 1204080.1 AQ Propagation Failing With ORA-25329 After Upgraded From 8i or 9i to 10g or 11g.Document 1233675.1 AQ Propagation stops after upgrade to 11.2.0.1 ORA-30757 4.3.1. Errors Related to Incorrect Network Configuration The most common propagation errors result from an incorrect network configuration. The list below contains common errors caused by tnsnames.ora file or database links being configured incorrectly: - ORA-12154: TNS:could not resolve service name- ORA-12505: TNS:listener does not currently know of SID given in connect descriptor- ORA-12514: TNS:listener could not resolve SERVICE_NAME - ORA-12541: TNS-12541 TNS:no listener 4.4. Check the Database Links Exist and are Functioning Correctly For schedules to remote databases confirm the database link exists via. SQL> col DBLINK for a45SQL> select QNAME, NVL(REGEXP_SUBSTR(DESTINATION, '[^@]+', 1, 2), DESTINATION) dblink2 from DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES3 where MESSAGE_DELIVERY_MODE = 'PERSISTENT';QNAME DBLINK------------------------------ ---------------------------------------------MY_QUEUE ORCL102B.WORLD Connect as the owner of the link and select across it to verify it works and connects to the database we expect. i.e. select * from ALL_QUEUES@ ORCL102B.WORLD; You need to ensure that the userid that scheduled the propagation (using DBMS_AQADM.SCHEDULE_PROPAGATION or DBMS_PROPAGATION_ADM.CREATE_PROPAGATION if using Streams) has access to the database link for the destination. 4.5. Has Propagation Been Correctly Scheduled? Check that the propagation schedule has been created and that a job queue process has been assigned. Look for the entry in DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES and SYS.AQ$_SCHEDULES for your schedule. For 10g and below, check that it has a JOBNO entry in SYS.AQ$_SCHEDULES, and that there is an entry in DBA_JOBS with that JOBNO. For 11g and above, check that the schedule has a JOB_NAME entry in SYS.AQ$_SCHEDULES, and that there is an entry in DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBS with that JOB_NAME. Check the destination is as intended and spelled correctly. SQL> select SCHEMA, QNAME, DESTINATION, SCHEDULE_DISABLED, PROCESS_NAME from DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES;SCHEMA QNAME DESTINATION S PROCESS------- ---------- ------------------ - -----------AQADM MULTIPLEQ AQ$_LOCAL N J000 AQ$_LOCAL in the destination column shows that the queue to which we are propagating to is in the same database as the source queue. If the propagation was to a remote (different) database, a database link will be in the DESTINATION column. The entry in the SCHEDULE_DISABLED column, N, means that the schedule is NOT disabled. If Y (yes) appears in this column, propagation is disabled and the schedule will not be executed. If not using Oracle Streams, propagation should resume once you have enabled the schedule by invoking DBMS_AQADM.ENABLE_PROPAGATION_SCHEDULE (for 10.2 Oracle Streams and above, the DBMS_PROPAGATION_ADM.START_PROPAGATION procedure should be used). The PROCESS_NAME is the name of the job queue process currently allocated to execute the schedule. This process is allocated dynamically at execution time. If the PROCESS_NAME column is null (empty) the schedule is not currently executing. You may need to execute this statement a number of times to verify if a process is being allocated. If a process is at some time allocated to the schedule, it is attempting to execute. SQL> select SCHEMA, QNAME, LAST_RUN_DATE, NEXT_RUN_DATE from DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES;SCHEMA QNAME LAST_RUN_DATE NEXT_RUN_DATE------ ----- ----------------------- ----------------------- AQADM MULTIPLEQ 13-FEB-2002 13:18:57 13-FEB-2002 13:20:30 In 11g, these dates are expressed in TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE datatypes. If the NEXT_RUN_DATE and NEXT_RUN_TIME columns are null when this statement is executed, the scheduled propagation is currently in progress. If they never change it would suggest that the schedule itself is never executing. If the next scheduled execution is too far away, change the NEXT_TIME parameter of the schedule so that schedules are executed more frequently (assuming that the window is not set to be infinite). Parameters of a schedule can be changed using the DBMS_AQADM.ALTER_PROPAGATION_SCHEDULE call. In 10g and below, scheduling propagation posts a job in the DBA_JOBS view. The columns are more or less the same as DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES so you just need to recognize the job and verify that it exists. SQL> select JOB, WHAT from DBA_JOBS where WHAT like '%sys.dbms_aqadm.aq$_propaq(job)%';JOB WHAT---- ----------------- 720 next_date := sys.dbms_aqadm.aq$_propaq(job); For 11g, scheduling propagation posts a job in DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBS instead: SQL> select JOB_NAME from DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBS where JOB_NAME like 'AQ_JOB$_%';JOB_NAME------------------------------AQ_JOB$_41 If no job exists, check DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES to make sure that the schedule has not been disabled. For 10g and below, the job number is dynamic for AQ propagation schedules. The procedure that is executed to expedite a propagation schedule runs, removes itself from DBA_JOBS, and then reposts a new job for the next scheduled propagation. The job number should therefore always increment unless the schedule has been set up to run indefinitely. 4.6. Is the Schedule Executing but Failing to Complete? Run the following query: SQL> select FAILURES, LAST_ERROR_MSG from DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES;FAILURES LAST_ERROR_MSG------------ -----------------------1 ORA-25207: enqueue failed, queue AQADM.INQ is disabled from enqueueingORA-02063: preceding line from SHANE816 The failures column shows how many times we have attempted to execute the schedule and failed. Oracle will attempt to execute the schedule 16 times after which it will be removed from the DBA_JOBS or DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBS view and the schedule will become disabled. The column DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES.SCHEDULE_DISABLED will show 'Y'. For 11g and above, the DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBS.STATE column will show 'BROKEN' for the job corresponding to DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES.JOB_NAME. Prior to 10g the back off algorithm for failures was exponential, whereas from 10g onwards it is linear. The propagation will become disabled on the 17th attempt. Only the last execution failure will be reflected in the LAST_ERROR_MSG column. That is, if the schedule fails 5 times for 5 different reasons, only the last set of errors will be recorded in DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES. Any errors need to be resolved to allow propagation to continue. If propagation has also become disabled due to 17 failures, first resolve the reason for the error and then re-enable the schedule using the DBMS_AQADM.ENABLE_PROPAGATION_SCHEDULE procedure, or DBMS_PROPAGATION_ADM.START_PROPAGATION if using 10.2 or above Oracle Streams. As soon as the schedule executes successfully the error message entries will be deleted. Oracle does not keep a history of past failures. However, when using Oracle Streams, the errors will be retained in the DBA_PROPAGATION view even after the schedule resumes successfully. See the following note for instructions on how to clear out the errors from the DBA_PROPAGATION view:Document 808136.1 How to clear the old errors from DBA_PROPAGATION view?If a schedule is active and no errors are being reported then the source queue may not have any messages to be propagated. 4.7. Do the Propagation Notification Queue Table and Queue Exist? Check to see that the propagation notification queue table and queue exist and are enabled for enqueue and dequeue. Propagation makes use of the propagation notification queue for handling propagation run-time events, and the messages in this queue are stored in a SYS-owned queue table. This queue should never be stopped or dropped and the corresponding queue table never be dropped. 10g and belowThe propagation notification queue table is of the format SYS.AQ$_PROP_TABLE_n, where 'n' is the RAC instance number, i.e. '1' for a non-RAC environment. This queue and queue table are created implicitly when propagation is first scheduled. If propagation has been scheduled and these objects do not exist, try unscheduling and rescheduling propagation. If they still do not exist contact Oracle Support. SQL> select QUEUE_TABLE from DBA_QUEUE_TABLES2 where QUEUE_TABLE like '%PROP_TABLE%' and OWNER = 'SYS';QUEUE_TABLE------------------------------AQ$_PROP_TABLE_1SQL> select NAME, ENQUEUE_ENABLED, DEQUEUE_ENABLED2 from DBA_QUEUES where owner='SYS'3 and QUEUE_TABLE like '%PROP_TABLE%';NAME ENQUEUE DEQUEUE------------------------------ ------- -------AQ$_PROP_NOTIFY_1 YES YESAQ$_AQ$_PROP_TABLE_1_E NO NO If the AQ$_PROP_NOTIFY_1 queue is not enabled for enqueue or dequeue, it should be so enabled using DBMS_AQADM.START_QUEUE. However, the exception queue AQ$_AQ$_PROP_TABLE_1_E should not be enabled for enqueue or dequeue.11g and aboveThe propagation notification queue table is of the format SYS.AQ_PROP_TABLE, and is created when the database is created. If they do not exist, contact Oracle Support. SQL> select QUEUE_TABLE from DBA_QUEUE_TABLES2 where QUEUE_TABLE like '%PROP_TABLE%' and OWNER = 'SYS';QUEUE_TABLE------------------------------AQ_PROP_TABLESQL> select NAME, ENQUEUE_ENABLED, DEQUEUE_ENABLED2 from DBA_QUEUES where owner='SYS'3 and QUEUE_TABLE like '%PROP_TABLE%';NAME ENQUEUE DEQUEUE------------------------------ ------- -------AQ_PROP_NOTIFY YES YESAQ$_AQ_PROP_TABLE_E NO NO If the AQ_PROP_NOTIFY queue is not enabled for enqueue or dequeue, it should be so enabled using DBMS_AQADM.START_QUEUE. However, the exception queue AQ$_AQ$_PROP_TABLE_E should not be enabled for enqueue or dequeue. 4.8. Does the Remote Queue Exist and is it Enabled for Enqueueing? Check that the remote queue the propagation is transferring messages to exists and is enabled for enqueue: SQL> select DESTINATION from USER_QUEUE_SCHEDULES where QNAME = 'OUTQ';DESTINATION-----------------------------------------------------------------------------"AQADM"."INQ"@M2V102.ESSQL> select OWNER, NAME, ENQUEUE_ENABLED, DEQUEUE_ENABLED from [email protected];OWNER NAME ENQUEUE DEQUEUE-------- ------ ----------- -----------AQADM INQ YES YES 4.9. Do the Target and Source Database Charactersets Differ? If a message fails to propagate, check the database charactersets of the source and target databases. Investigate whether the same message can propagate between the databases with the same characterset or it is only a particular combination of charactersets which causes a problem. 4.10. Check the Queue Table Type Agreement Propagation is not possible between queue tables which have types that differ in some respect. One way to determine if this is the case is to run the DBMS_AQADM.VERIFY_QUEUE_TYPES procedure for the two queues that the propagation operates on. If the types do not agree, DBMS_AQADM.VERIFY_QUEUE_TYPES will return '0'.For AQ propagation between databases which have different NLS_LENGTH_SEMANTICS settings, propagation will not work, unless the queues are Oracle Streams ANYDATA queues.See the following notes for issues caused by lack of type agreement:Document 1079577.1 Advanced Queuing Propagation Fails With "ORA-22370: incorrect usage of method"Document 282987.1 Propagated Messages marked UNDELIVERABLE after Drop and Recreate Of Remote QueueDocument 353754.1 Streams Messaging Propagation Fails between Single and Multi-byte Charactersets when using Chararacter Length Semantics in the ADT 4.11. Enable Propagation Tracing 4.11.1. System Level This is set it in the init.ora/spfile as follows: event="24040 trace name context forever, level 10" and restart the instanceThis event cannot be set dynamically with an alter system command until version 10.2: SQL> alter system set events '24040 trace name context forever, level 10'; To unset the event: SQL> alter system set events '24040 trace name context off'; Debugging information will be logged to job queue trace file(s) (jnnn) as propagation takes place. You can check the trace file for errors, and for statements indicating that messages have been sent. For the most part the trace information is understandable. This trace should also be uploaded to Oracle Support if a service request is created. 4.11.2. Attaching to a Specific Process We can also attach to an existing job queue processes that is running a propagation schedule and trace it individually using the oradebug utility, as follows:10.2 and below connect / as sysdbaselect p.SPID, p.PROGRAM from v$PROCESS p, DBA_JOBS_RUNNING jr, V$SESSION s, DBA_JOBS j where s.SID=jr.SID and s.PADDR=p.ADDR and jr.JOB=j.JOB and j.WHAT like '%sys.dbms_aqadm.aq$_propaq(job)%';-- For the process id (SPID) attach to it via oradebug and generate the following traceoradebug setospid <SPID>oradebug unlimitoradebug Event 10046 trace name context forever, level 12oradebug Event 24040 trace name context forever, level 10-- Trace the process for 5 minutesoradebug Event 10046 trace name context offoradebug Event 24040 trace name context off-- The following command returns the pathname/filename to the file being written tooradebug tracefile_name 11g connect / as sysdbacol PROGRAM for a30select p.SPID, p.PROGRAM, j.JOB_NAMEfrom v$PROCESS p, DBA_SCHEDULER_RUNNING_JOBS jr, V$SESSION s, DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBS j where s.SID=jr.SESSION_ID and s.PADDR=p.ADDR and jr.JOB_NAME=j.JOB_NAME and j.JOB_NAME like '%AQ_JOB$_%';-- For the process id (SPID) attach to it via oradebug and generate the following traceoradebug setospid <SPID>oradebug unlimitoradebug Event 10046 trace name context forever, level 12oradebug Event 24040 trace name context forever, level 10-- Trace the process for 5 minutesoradebug Event 10046 trace name context offoradebug Event 24040 trace name context off-- The following command returns the pathname/filename to the file being written tooradebug tracefile_name 4.11.3. Further Tracing The previous tracing steps only trace the job queue process executing the propagation on the source. At times it is useful to trace the propagation receiver process (the session which is enqueueing the messages into the target queue) on the target database which is associated with the job queue process on the source database.These following queries provide ways of identifying the processes involved in propagation so that you can attach to them via oradebug to generate trace information.In order to identify the propagation receiver process you need to execute the query as a user with privileges to access the v$ views in both the local and remote databases so the database link must connect as a user with those privileges in the remote database. The <DBLINK> in the queries should be replaced by the appropriate database link.The queries have two forms due to the differences between operating systems. The value returned by 'Rem Process' is the operating system identifier of the propagation receiver on the remote database. Once identified, this process can be attached to and traced on the remote database using the commands given in Section 4.11.2.10.2 and below - Windows select pl.SPID "JobQ Process", pl.PROGRAM, sr.PROCESS "Rem Process" from v$PROCESS pl, DBA_JOBS_RUNNING jr, V$SESSION s, DBA_JOBS j, V$SESSION@<DBLINK> sr where s.SID=jr.SID and s.PADDR=pl.ADDR and jr.JOB=j.JOB and j.WHAT like '%sys.dbms_aqadm.aq$_propaq(job)%' and pl.SPID=substr(sr.PROCESS, instr(sr.PROCESS,':')+1); 10.2 and below - Unix select pl.SPID "JobQ Process", pl.PROGRAM, sr.PROCESS "Rem Process" from V$PROCESS pl, DBA_JOBS_RUNNING jr, V$SESSION s, DBA_JOBS j, V$SESSION@<DBLINK> sr where s.SID=jr.SID and s.PADDR=pl.ADDR and jr.JOB=j.JOB and j.WHAT like '%sys.dbms_aqadm.aq$_propaq(job)%' and pl.SPID=sr.PROCESS; 11g - Windows select pl.SPID "JobQ Process", pl.PROGRAM, sr.PROCESS "Rem Process" from V$PROCESS pl, DBA_SCHEDULER_RUNNING_JOBS jr, V$SESSION s, DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBS j, V$SESSION@<DBLINK> sr where s.SID=jr.SESSION_ID and s.PADDR=pl.ADDR and jr.JOB_NAME=j.JOB_NAME and j.JOB_NAME like '%AQ_JOB$_%%' and pl.SPID=substr(sr.PROCESS, instr(sr.PROCESS,':')+1); 11g - Unix select pl.SPID "JobQ Process", pl.PROGRAM, sr.PROCESS "Rem Process" from V$PROCESS pl, DBA_SCHEDULER_RUNNING_JOBS jr, V$SESSION s, DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBS j, V$SESSION@<DBLINK> sr where s.SID=jr.SESSION_ID and s.PADDR=pl.ADDR and jr.JOB_NAME=j.JOB_NAME and j.JOB_NAME like '%AQ_JOB$_%%' and pl.SPID=sr.PROCESS;   5. Additional Troubleshooting Steps for AQ Propagation of User-Enqueued and Dequeued Messages 5.1. Check the Privileges of All Users Involved Ensure that the owner of the database link has the necessary privileges on the aq packages. SQL> select TABLE_NAME, PRIVILEGE from USER_TAB_PRIVS;TABLE_NAME PRIVILEGE------------------------------ ----------------------------------------DBMS_LOCK EXECUTEDBMS_AQ EXECUTEDBMS_AQADM EXECUTEDBMS_AQ_BQVIEW EXECUTEQT52814_BUFFER SELECT Note that when queue table is created, a view called QT<nnn>_BUFFER is created in the SYS schema, and the queue table owner is given SELECT privileges on it. The <nnn> corresponds to the object_id of the associated queue table. SQL> select * from USER_ROLE_PRIVS;USERNAME GRANTED_ROLE ADM DEF OS_------------------------------ ------------------------------ ---- ---- ---AQ_USER1 AQ_ADMINISTRATOR_ROLE NO YES NOAQ_USER1 CONNECT NO YES NOAQ_USER1 RESOURCE NO YES NO It is good practice to configure central AQ administrative user. All admin and processing jobs are created, executed and administered as this user. This configuration is not mandatory however, and the database link can be owned by any existing queue user. If this latter configuration is used, ensure that the connecting user has the necessary privileges on the AQ packages and objects involved. Privileges for an AQ Administrative user Execute on DBMS_AQADM Execute on DBMS_AQ Granted the AQ_ADMINISTRATOR_ROLE Privileges for an AQ user Execute on DBMS_AQ Execute on the message payload Enqueue privileges on the remote queue Dequeue privileges on the originating queue Privileges need to be confirmed on both sites when propagation is scheduled to remote destinations. Verify that the user ID used to login to the destination through the database link has been granted privileges to use AQ. 5.2. Verify Queue Payload Types AQ will not propagate messages from one queue to another if the payload types of the two queues are not verified to be equivalent. An AQ administrator can verify if the source and destination's payload types match by executing the DBMS_AQADM.VERIFY_QUEUE_TYPES procedure. The results of the type checking will be stored in the SYS.AQ$_MESSAGE_TYPES table. This table can be accessed using the object identifier OID of the source queue and the address database link of the destination queue, i.e. [schema.]queue_name[@destination]. Prior to Oracle 9i the payload (message type) had to be the same for all the queue tables involved in propagation. From Oracle9i onwards a transformation can be used so that payloads can be converted from one type to another. The following procedural call made on the source database can verify whether we can propagate between the source and the destination queue tables. connect aq_user1/[email protected] serverout onDECLARErc_value number;BEGINDBMS_AQADM.VERIFY_QUEUE_TYPES(src_queue_name => 'AQ_USER1.Q_1', dest_queue_name => 'AQ_USER2.Q_2',destination => 'dbl_aq_user2.es',rc => rc_value);dbms_output.put_line('rc_value code is '||rc_value);END;/ If propagation is possible then the return code value will be 1. If it is 0 then propagation is not possible and further investigation of the types and transformations used by and in conjunction with the queue tables is required. With regard to comparison of the types the following sql can be used to extract the DDL for a specific type with' %' changed appropriately on the source and target. This can then be compared for the source and target. SET LONG 20000 set pagesize 50 EXECUTE DBMS_METADATA.SET_TRANSFORM_PARAM(DBMS_METADATA.SESSION_TRANSFORM, 'STORAGE',false); SELECT DBMS_METADATA.GET_DDL('TYPE',t.type_name) from user_types t WHERE t.type_name like '%'; EXECUTE DBMS_METADATA.SET_TRANSFORM_PARAM(DBMS_METADATA.SESSION_TRANSFORM, 'DEFAULT'); 5.3. Check Message State and Destination The first step in this process is to identify the queue table associated with the problem source queue. Although you schedule propagation for a specific queue, most of the meta-data associated with that queue is stored in the underlying queue table. The following statement finds the queue table for a given queue (note that this is a multiple-consumer queue table). SQL> select QUEUE_TABLE from DBA_QUEUES where NAME = 'MULTIPLEQ';QUEUE_TABLE --------------------MULTIPLEQTABLE For a small amount of messages in a multiple-consumer queue table, the following query can be run: SQL> select MSG_STATE, CONSUMER_NAME, ADDRESS from AQ$MULTIPLEQTABLE where QUEUE = 'MULTIPLEQ';MSG_STATE CONSUMER_NAME ADDRESS-------------- ----------------------- -------------READY AQUSER2 [email protected] AQUSER1READY AQUSER3 AQADM.INQ In this example we see 2 messages ready to be propagated to remote queues and 1 that is not. If the address column is blank, the message is not scheduled for propagation and can only be dequeued from the queue upon which it was enqueued. The MSG_STATE column values are discussed in Document 102330.1 Advanced Queueing MSG_STATE Values and their Interpretation. If the address column has a value, the message has been enqueued for propagation to another queue. The first row in the example includes a database link (@M2V102.ES). This demonstrates that the message should be propagated to a queue at a remote database. The third row does not include a database link so will be propagated to a queue that resides on the same database as the source queue. The consumer name is the intended recipient at the target queue. Note that we are not querying the base queue table directly; rather, we are querying a view that is available on top of every queue table, AQ$<queue_table_name>.A more realistic query in an environment where the queue table contains thousands of messages is8.0.3-compatible multiple-consumer queue table and all compatibility single-consumer queue tables select count(*), MSG_STATE, QUEUE from AQ$<queue_table_name>  group by MSG_STATE, QUEUE; 8.1.3 and 10.0-compatible queue tables select count(*), MSG_STATE, QUEUE, CONSUMER_NAME from AQ$<queue_table_name>group by MSG_STATE, QUEUE, CONSUMER_NAME; For multiple-consumer queue tables, if you did not see the expected CONSUMER_NAME , check the syntax of the enqueue code and verify the recipients are declared correctly. If a recipients list is not used on enqueue, check the subscriber list in the AQ$_<queue_table_name>_S view (note that a single-consumer queue table does not have a subscriber view. This view records all members of the default subscription list which were added using the DBMS_AQADM.ADD_SUBSCRIBER procedure and also those enqueued using a recipient list. SQL> select QUEUE, NAME, ADDRESS from AQ$MULTIPLEQTABLE_S;QUEUE NAME ADDRESS---------- ----------- -------------MULTIPLEQ AQUSER2 [email protected] AQUSER1 In this example we have 2 subscribers registered with the queue. We have a local subscriber AQUSER1, and a remote subscriber AQUSER2, on the queue INQ, owned by AQADM, at M2V102.ES. Unless overridden with a recipient list during enqueue every message enqueued to this queue will be propagated to INQ at M2V102.ES.For 8.1 style and above multiple consumer queue tables, you can also check the following information at the target: select CONSUMER_NAME, DEQ_TXN_ID, DEQ_TIME, DEQ_USER_ID, PROPAGATED_MSGID from AQ$<queue_table_name> where QUEUE = '<QUEUE_NAME>'; For 8.0 style queues, if the queue table supports multiple consumers you can obtain the same information from the history column of the queue table: select h.CONSUMER, h.TRANSACTION_ID, h.DEQ_TIME, h.DEQ_USER, h.PROPAGATED_MSGIDfrom AQ$<queue_table_name> t, table(t.history) h where t.Q_NAME = '<QUEUE_NAME>'; A non-NULL TRANSACTION_ID indicates that the message was successfully propagated. Further, the DEQ_TIME indicates the time of propagation, the DEQ_USER indicates the userid used for propagation, and the PROPAGATED_MSGID indicates the message ID of the message that was enqueued at the destination. 6. Additional Troubleshooting Steps for Propagation in an Oracle Streams Environment 6.1. Is the Propagation Enabled? For a propagation job to propagate messages, the propagation must be enabled. For Streams, a special view called DBA_PROPAGATION exists to convey information about Streams propagations. If messages are not being propagated by a propagation as expected, then the propagation might not be enabled. To query for this: SELECT p.PROPAGATION_NAME, DECODE(s.SCHEDULE_DISABLED, 'Y', 'Disabled','N', 'Enabled') SCHEDULE_DISABLED, s.PROCESS_NAME, s.FAILURES, s.LAST_ERROR_MSGFROM DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES s, DBA_PROPAGATION pWHERE p.DESTINATION_DBLINK = NVL(REGEXP_SUBSTR(s.DESTINATION, '[^@]+', 1, 2), s.DESTINATION) AND s.SCHEMA = p.SOURCE_QUEUE_OWNER AND s.QNAME = p.SOURCE_QUEUE_NAME AND MESSAGE_DELIVERY_MODE = 'PERSISTENT' order by PROPAGATION_NAME; At times, the propagation job may become "broken" or fail to start after an error has been encountered or after a database restart. If an error is indicated by the above query, an attempt to disable the propagation and then re-enable it can be made. In the examples below, for the propagation named STRMADMIN_PROPAGATE where the queue name is STREAMS_QUEUE owned by STRMADMIN and the destination database link is ORCL2.WORLD, the commands would be:10.2 and above exec dbms_propagation_adm.stop_propagation('STRMADMIN_PROPAGATE'); exec dbms_propagation_adm.start_propagation('STRMADMIN_PROPAGATE'); If the above does not fix the problem, stop the propagation specifying the force parameter (2nd parameter on stop_propagation) as TRUE: exec dbms_propagation_adm.stop_propagation('STRMADMIN_PROPAGATE',true); exec dbms_propagation_adm.start_propagation('STRMADMIN_PROPAGATE'); The statistics for the propagation as well as any old error messages are cleared when the force parameter is set to TRUE. Therefore if the propagation schedule is stopped with FORCE set to TRUE, and upon restart there is still an error message in DBA_PROPAGATION, then the error message is current.9.2 or 10.1 exec dbms_aqadm.disable_propagation_schedule('STRMADMIN.STREAMS_QUEUE','ORCL2.WORLD'); exec dbms.aqadm.enable_propagation_schedule('STRMADMIN.STREAMS_QUEUE','ORCL2.WORLD'); If the above does not fix the problem, perform an unschedule of propagation and then schedule_propagation: exec dbms_aqadm.unschedule_propagation('STRMADMIN.STREAMS_QUEUE','ORCL2.WORLD'); exec dbms_aqadm.schedule_propagation('STRMADMIN.STREAMS_QUEUE','ORCL2.WORLD'); Typically if the error from the first query in Section 6.1 recurs after restarting the propagation as shown above, further troubleshooting of the error is needed. 6.2. Check Propagation Rule Sets and Transformations Inspect the configuration of the rules in the rule set that is associated with the propagation process to make sure that they evaluate to TRUE as expected. If not, then the object or schema will not be propagated. Remember that when a negative rule evaluates to TRUE, the specified object or schema will not be propagated. Finally inspect any rule-based transformations that are implemented with propagation to make sure they are changing the data in the intended way.The following query shows what rule sets are assigned to a propagation: select PROPAGATION_NAME, RULE_SET_OWNER||'.'||RULE_SET_NAME "Positive Rule Set",NEGATIVE_RULE_SET_OWNER||'.'||NEGATIVE_RULE_SET_NAME "Negative Rule Set"from DBA_PROPAGATION; The next two queries list the propagation rules and their conditions. The first is for the positive rule set, the second is for the negative rule set: set long 4000select rsr.RULE_SET_OWNER||'.'||rsr.RULE_SET_NAME RULE_SET ,rsr.RULE_OWNER||'.'||rsr.RULE_NAME RULE_NAME,r.RULE_CONDITION CONDITION fromDBA_RULE_SET_RULES rsr, DBA_RULES rwhere rsr.RULE_NAME = r.RULE_NAME and rsr.RULE_OWNER = r.RULE_OWNER and RULE_SET_NAME in(select RULE_SET_NAME from DBA_PROPAGATION) order by rsr.RULE_SET_OWNER, rsr.RULE_SET_NAME;   set long 4000select c.PROPAGATION_NAME, rsr.RULE_SET_OWNER||'.'||rsr.RULE_SET_NAME RULE_SET ,rsr.RULE_OWNER||'.'||rsr.RULE_NAME RULE_NAME,r.RULE_CONDITION CONDITION fromDBA_RULE_SET_RULES rsr, DBA_RULES r ,DBA_PROPAGATION cwhere rsr.RULE_NAME = r.RULE_NAME and rsr.RULE_OWNER = r.RULE_OWNER andrsr.RULE_SET_OWNER=c.NEGATIVE_RULE_SET_OWNER and rsr.RULE_SET_NAME=c.NEGATIVE_RULE_SET_NAMEand rsr.RULE_SET_NAME in(select NEGATIVE_RULE_SET_NAME from DBA_PROPAGATION) order by rsr.RULE_SET_OWNER, rsr.RULE_SET_NAME; 6.3. Determining the Total Number of Messages and Bytes Propagated As in Section 3.1, determining if messages are flowing can be instructive to see whether the propagation is entirely hung or just slow. If the propagation is not in flow control (see Section 6.5.2), but the statistics are incrementing slowly, there may be a performance issue. For Streams implementations two views are available that can assist with this that can show the number of messages sent by a propagation, as well as the number of acknowledgements being returned from the target site: the V$PROPAGATION_SENDER view at the Source site and the V$PROPAGATION_RECEIVER view at the destination site. It is helpful to query both to determine if messages are being delivered to the target. Look for the statistics to increase.Source: select QUEUE_SCHEMA, QUEUE_NAME, DBLINK,HIGH_WATER_MARK, ACKNOWLEDGEMENT, TOTAL_MSGS, TOTAL_BYTESfrom V$PROPAGATION_SENDER; Target: select SRC_QUEUE_SCHEMA, SRC_QUEUE_NAME, SRC_DBNAME, DST_QUEUE_SCHEMA, DST_QUEUE_NAME, HIGH_WATER_MARK, ACKNOWLEDGEMENT, TOTAL_MSGS from V$PROPAGATION_RECEIVER; 6.4. Check Buffered Subscribers The V$BUFFERED_SUBSCRIBERS view displays information about subscribers for all buffered queues in the instance. This view can be queried to make sure that the site that the propagation is propagating to is listed as a subscriber address for the site being propagated from: select QUEUE_SCHEMA, QUEUE_NAME, SUBSCRIBER_ADDRESS from V$BUFFERED_SUBSCRIBERS; The SUBSCRIBER_ADDRESS column will not be populated when the propagation is local (between queues on the same database). 6.5. Common Streams Propagation Errors 6.5.1. ORA-02082: A loopback database link must have a connection qualifier. This error can occur if you use the Streams Setup Wizard in Oracle Enterprise Manager without first configuring the GLOBAL_NAME for your database. 6.5.2. ORA-25307: Enqueue rate too high. Enable flow control DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES will display this informational message for propagation when the automatic flow control (10g feature of Streams) has been invoked.Similar to Streams capture processes, a Streams propagation process can also go into a state of 'flow control. This is an informative message that indicates flow control has been automatically enabled to reduce the rate at which messages are being enqueued into at target queue.This typically occurs when the target site is unable to keep up with the rate of messages flowing from the source site. Other than checking that the apply process is running normally on the target site, usually no action is required by the DBA. Propagation and the capture process will be resumed automatically when the target site is able to accept more messages.The following document contains more information:Document 302109.1 Streams Propagation Error: ORA-25307 Enqueue rate too high. Enable flow controlSee the following document for one potential cause of this situation:Document 1097115.1 Oracle Streams Apply Reader is in 'Paused' State 6.5.3. ORA-25315 unsupported configuration for propagation of buffered messages This error typically occurs when the target database is RAC and usually indicates that an attempt was made to propagate buffered messages with the database link pointing to an instance in the destination database which is not the owner instance of the destination queue. To resolve the problem, use queue-to-queue propagation for buffered messages. 6.5.4. ORA-600 [KWQBMCRCPTS101] after dropping / recreating propagation For cause/fixes refer to:Document 421237.1 ORA-600 [KWQBMCRCPTS101] reported by a Qmon slave process after dropping a Streams Propagation 6.5.5. Stopping or Dropping a Streams Propagation Hangs See the following note:Document 1159787.1 Troubleshooting Streams Propagation When It is Not Functioning and Attempts to Stop It Hang 6.6. Streams Propagation-Related Notes for Common Issues Document 437838.1 Streams Specific PatchesDocument 749181.1 How to Recover Streams After Dropping PropagationDocument 368912.1 Queue to Queue Propagation Schedule encountered ORA-12514 in a RAC environmentDocument 564649.1 ORA-02068/ORA-03114/ORA-03113 Errors From Streams Propagation Process - Remote Database is Available and Unschedule/Reschedule Does Not ResolveDocument 553017.1 Stream Propagation Process Errors Ora-4052 Ora-6554 From 11g To 10201Document 944846.1 Streams Propagation Fails Ora-7445 [kohrsmc]Document 745601.1 ORA-23603 'STREAMS enqueue aborted due to low SGA' Error from Streams Propagation, and V$STREAMS_CAPTURE.STATE Hanging on 'Enqueuing Message'Document 333068.1 ORA-23603: Streams Enqueue Aborted Eue To Low SGADocument 363496.1 Ora-25315 Propagating on RAC StreamsDocument 368237.1 Unable to Unschedule Propagation. Streams Queue is InvalidDocument 436332.1 dbms_propagation_adm.stop_propagation hangsDocument 727389.1 Propagation Fails With ORA-12528Document 730911.1 ORA-4063 Is Reported After Dropping Negative Prop.RulesetDocument 460471.1 Propagation Blocked by Qmon Process - Streams_queue_table / 'library cache lock' waitsDocument 1165583.1 ORA-600 [kwqpuspse0-ack] In Streams EnvironmentDocument 1059029.1 Combined Capture and Apply (CCA) : Capture aborts : ORA-1422 after schedule_propagationDocument 556309.1 Changing Propagation/ queue_to_queue : false -> true does does not work; no LCRs propagatedDocument 839568.1 Propagation failing with error: ORA-01536: space quota exceeded for tablespace ''Document 311021.1 Streams Propagation Process : Ora 12154 After Reboot with Transparent Application Failover TAF configuredDocument 359971.1 STREAMS propagation to Primary of physical Standby configuation errors with Ora-01033, Ora-02068Document 1101616.1 DBMS_PROPAGATION_ADM.DROP_PROPAGATION FAILS WITH ORA-1747 7. Performance Issues A propagation may seem to be slow if the queries from Sections 3.1 and 6.3 show that the message statistics are not changing quickly. In Oracle Streams, this more usually is due to a slow apply process at the target rather than a slow propagation. Propagation could be inferred to be slow if the message statistics are changing, and the state of a capture process according to V$STREAMS_CAPTURE.STATE is PAUSED FOR FLOW CONTROL, but an ORA-25307 'Enqueue rate too high. Enable flow control' warning is NOT observed in DBA_QUEUE_SCHEDULES per Section 6.5.2. If this is the case, see the following notes / white papers for suggestions to increase performance:Document 335516.1 Master Note for Streams Performance RecommendationsDocument 730036.1 Overview for Troubleshooting Streams Performance IssuesDocument 780733.1 Streams Propagation Tuning with Network ParametersWhite Paper: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/features/availability/maa-wp-10gr2-streams-performance-130059.pdfWhite Paper: Oracle Streams Configuration Best Practices: Oracle Database 10g Release 10.2, http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/features/availability/maa-10gr2-streams-configuration-132039.pdf, See APPENDIX A: USING STREAMS CONFIGURATIONS OVER A NETWORKFor basic AQ propagation, the network tuning in the aforementioned Appendix A of the white paper 'Oracle Streams Configuration Best Practices: Oracle Database 10g Release 10.2' is applicable. References NOTE:102330.1 - Advanced Queueing MSG_STATE Values and their InterpretationNOTE:102771.1 - Advanced Queueing Propagation using PL/SQLNOTE:1059029.1 - Combined Capture and Apply (CCA) : Capture aborts : ORA-1422 after schedule_propagationNOTE:1079577.1 - Advanced Queuing Propagation Fails With "ORA-22370: incorrect usage of method"NOTE:1083608.1 - 11g Streams and Oracle SchedulerNOTE:1087324.1 - ORA-01405 ORA-01422 reported by Adavanced Queueing Propagation schedules after RAC reconfigurationNOTE:1097115.1 - Oracle Streams Apply Reader is in 'Paused' StateNOTE:1101616.1 - DBMS_PROPAGATION_ADM.DROP_PROPAGATION FAILS WITH ORA-1747NOTE:1159787.1 - Troubleshooting Streams Propagation When It is Not Functioning and Attempts to Stop It HangNOTE:1165583.1 - ORA-600 [kwqpuspse0-ack] In Streams EnvironmentNOTE:118884.1 - How to unschedule a propagation schedule stuck in pending stateNOTE:1203544.1 - AQ PROPAGATION ABORTED WITH ORA-600[OCIKSIN: INVALID STATUS] ON SYS.DBMS_AQADM_SYS.AQ$_PROPAGATION_PROCEDURE AFTER UPGRADENOTE:1204080.1 - AQ Propagation Failing With ORA-25329 After Upgraded From 8i or 9i to 10g or 11g.NOTE:219416.1 - Advanced Queuing Propagation fails with ORA-22922NOTE:222992.1 - DBMS_AQADM.DISABLE_PROPAGATION_SCHEDULE Returns ORA-24082NOTE:253131.1 - Concurrent Writes May Corrupt LOB Segment When Using Auto Segment Space Management (ORA-1555)NOTE:282987.1 - Propagated Messages marked UNDELIVERABLE after Drop and Recreate Of Remote QueueNOTE:298015.1 - Kwqjswproc:Excep After Loop: Assigning To SelfNOTE:302109.1 - Streams Propagation Error: ORA-25307 Enqueue rate too high. Enable flow controlNOTE:311021.1 - Streams Propagation Process : Ora 12154 After Reboot with Transparent Application Failover TAF configuredNOTE:332792.1 - ORA-04061 error relating to SYS.DBMS_PRVTAQIP reported when setting up StatspackNOTE:333068.1 - ORA-23603: Streams Enqueue Aborted Eue To Low SGANOTE:335516.1 - Master Note for Streams Performance RecommendationsNOTE:353325.1 - ORA-24056: Internal inconsistency for QUEUE and destination NOTE:353754.1 - Streams Messaging Propagation Fails between Single and Multi-byte Charactersets when using Chararacter Length Semantics in the ADT.NOTE:359971.1 - STREAMS propagation to Primary of physical Standby configuation errors with Ora-01033, Ora-02068NOTE:363496.1 - Ora-25315 Propagating on RAC StreamsNOTE:365093.1 - ORA-07445 [kwqppay2aqe()+7360] reported on Propagation of a Transformed MessageNOTE:368237.1 - Unable to Unschedule Propagation. Streams Queue is InvalidNOTE:368912.1 - Queue to Queue Propagation Schedule encountered ORA-12514 in a RAC environmentNOTE:421237.1 - ORA-600 [KWQBMCRCPTS101] reported by a Qmon slave process after dropping a Streams PropagationNOTE:436332.1 - dbms_propagation_adm.stop_propagation hangsNOTE:437838.1 - Streams Specific PatchesNOTE:460471.1 - Propagation Blocked by Qmon Process - Streams_queue_table / 'library cache lock' waitsNOTE:463820.1 - Streams Combined Capture and Apply in 11gNOTE:553017.1 - Stream Propagation Process Errors Ora-4052 Ora-6554 From 11g To 10201NOTE:556309.1 - Changing Propagation/ queue_to_queue : false -> true does does not work; no LCRs propagatedNOTE:564649.1 - ORA-02068/ORA-03114/ORA-03113 Errors From Streams Propagation Process - Remote Database is Available and Unschedule/Reschedule Does Not ResolveNOTE:566622.1 - ORA-22275 when propagating >4K AQ$_JMS_TEXT_MESSAGEs from 9.2.0.8 to 10.2.0.1NOTE:727389.1 - Propagation Fails With ORA-12528NOTE:730036.1 - Overview for Troubleshooting Streams Performance IssuesNOTE:730911.1 - ORA-4063 Is Reported After Dropping Negative Prop.RulesetNOTE:731292.1 - ORA-25215 Reported On Local Propagation When Using Transformation with ANYDATA queue tablesNOTE:731539.1 - ORA-29268: HTTP client error 401 Unauthorized Error when the AQ Servlet attempts to Propagate a message via HTTPNOTE:745601.1 - ORA-23603 'STREAMS enqueue aborted due to low SGA' Error from Streams Propagation, and V$STREAMS_CAPTURE.STATE Hanging on 'Enqueuing Message'NOTE:749181.1 - How to Recover Streams After Dropping PropagationNOTE:780733.1 - Streams Propagation Tuning with Network ParametersNOTE:787367.1 - ORA-22275 reported on Propagating Messages with LOB component when propagating between 10.1 and 10.2NOTE:808136.1 - How to clear the old errors from DBA_PROPAGATION view ?NOTE:827184.1 - AQ Propagation with CLOB data types Fails with ORA-22990NOTE:827473.1 - How to alter propagation from queue_to_queue to queue_to_dblinkNOTE:839568.1 - Propagation failing with error: ORA-01536: space quota exceeded for tablespace ''NOTE:846297.1 - AQ Propagation Fails : ORA-00600[kope2upic2954] or Ora-00600[Kghsstream_copyn]NOTE:944846.1 - Streams Propagation Fails Ora-7445 [kohrsmc]

    Read the article

  • Toorcon 15 (2013)

    - by danx
    The Toorcon gang (senior staff): h1kari (founder), nfiltr8, and Geo Introduction to Toorcon 15 (2013) A Tale of One Software Bypass of MS Windows 8 Secure Boot Breaching SSL, One Byte at a Time Running at 99%: Surviving an Application DoS Security Response in the Age of Mass Customized Attacks x86 Rewriting: Defeating RoP and other Shinanighans Clowntown Express: interesting bugs and running a bug bounty program Active Fingerprinting of Encrypted VPNs Making Attacks Go Backwards Mask Your Checksums—The Gorry Details Adventures with weird machines thirty years after "Reflections on Trusting Trust" Introduction to Toorcon 15 (2013) Toorcon 15 is the 15th annual security conference held in San Diego. I've attended about a third of them and blogged about previous conferences I attended here starting in 2003. As always, I've only summarized the talks I attended and interested me enough to write about them. Be aware that I may have misrepresented the speaker's remarks and that they are not my remarks or opinion, or those of my employer, so don't quote me or them. Those seeking further details may contact the speakers directly or use The Google. For some talks, I have a URL for further information. A Tale of One Software Bypass of MS Windows 8 Secure Boot Andrew Furtak and Oleksandr Bazhaniuk Yuri Bulygin, Oleksandr ("Alex") Bazhaniuk, and (not present) Andrew Furtak Yuri and Alex talked about UEFI and Bootkits and bypassing MS Windows 8 Secure Boot, with vendor recommendations. They previously gave this talk at the BlackHat 2013 conference. MS Windows 8 Secure Boot Overview UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) is interface between hardware and OS. UEFI is processor and architecture independent. Malware can replace bootloader (bootx64.efi, bootmgfw.efi). Once replaced can modify kernel. Trivial to replace bootloader. Today many legacy bootkits—UEFI replaces them most of them. MS Windows 8 Secure Boot verifies everything you load, either through signatures or hashes. UEFI firmware relies on secure update (with signed update). You would think Secure Boot would rely on ROM (such as used for phones0, but you can't do that for PCs—PCs use writable memory with signatures DXE core verifies the UEFI boat loader(s) OS Loader (winload.efi, winresume.efi) verifies the OS kernel A chain of trust is established with a root key (Platform Key, PK), which is a cert belonging to the platform vendor. Key Exchange Keys (KEKs) verify an "authorized" database (db), and "forbidden" database (dbx). X.509 certs with SHA-1/SHA-256 hashes. Keys are stored in non-volatile (NV) flash-based NVRAM. Boot Services (BS) allow adding/deleting keys (can't be accessed once OS starts—which uses Run-Time (RT)). Root cert uses RSA-2048 public keys and PKCS#7 format signatures. SecureBoot — enable disable image signature checks SetupMode — update keys, self-signed keys, and secure boot variables CustomMode — allows updating keys Secure Boot policy settings are: always execute, never execute, allow execute on security violation, defer execute on security violation, deny execute on security violation, query user on security violation Attacking MS Windows 8 Secure Boot Secure Boot does NOT protect from physical access. Can disable from console. Each BIOS vendor implements Secure Boot differently. There are several platform and BIOS vendors. It becomes a "zoo" of implementations—which can be taken advantage of. Secure Boot is secure only when all vendors implement it correctly. Allow only UEFI firmware signed updates protect UEFI firmware from direct modification in flash memory protect FW update components program SPI controller securely protect secure boot policy settings in nvram protect runtime api disable compatibility support module which allows unsigned legacy Can corrupt the Platform Key (PK) EFI root certificate variable in SPI flash. If PK is not found, FW enters setup mode wich secure boot turned off. Can also exploit TPM in a similar manner. One is not supposed to be able to directly modify the PK in SPI flash from the OS though. But they found a bug that they can exploit from User Mode (undisclosed) and demoed the exploit. It loaded and ran their own bootkit. The exploit requires a reboot. Multiple vendors are vulnerable. They will disclose this exploit to vendors in the future. Recommendations: allow only signed updates protect UEFI fw in ROM protect EFI variable store in ROM Breaching SSL, One Byte at a Time Yoel Gluck and Angelo Prado Angelo Prado and Yoel Gluck, Salesforce.com CRIME is software that performs a "compression oracle attack." This is possible because the SSL protocol doesn't hide length, and because SSL compresses the header. CRIME requests with every possible character and measures the ciphertext length. Look for the plaintext which compresses the most and looks for the cookie one byte-at-a-time. SSL Compression uses LZ77 to reduce redundancy. Huffman coding replaces common byte sequences with shorter codes. US CERT thinks the SSL compression problem is fixed, but it isn't. They convinced CERT that it wasn't fixed and they issued a CVE. BREACH, breachattrack.com BREACH exploits the SSL response body (Accept-Encoding response, Content-Encoding). It takes advantage of the fact that the response is not compressed. BREACH uses gzip and needs fairly "stable" pages that are static for ~30 seconds. It needs attacker-supplied content (say from a web form or added to a URL parameter). BREACH listens to a session's requests and responses, then inserts extra requests and responses. Eventually, BREACH guesses a session's secret key. Can use compression to guess contents one byte at-a-time. For example, "Supersecret SupersecreX" (a wrong guess) compresses 10 bytes, and "Supersecret Supersecret" (a correct guess) compresses 11 bytes, so it can find each character by guessing every character. To start the guess, BREACH needs at least three known initial characters in the response sequence. Compression length then "leaks" information. Some roadblocks include no winners (all guesses wrong) or too many winners (multiple possibilities that compress the same). The solutions include: lookahead (guess 2 or 3 characters at-a-time instead of 1 character). Expensive rollback to last known conflict check compression ratio can brute-force first 3 "bootstrap" characters, if needed (expensive) block ciphers hide exact plain text length. Solution is to align response in advance to block size Mitigations length: use variable padding secrets: dynamic CSRF tokens per request secret: change over time separate secret to input-less servlets Future work eiter understand DEFLATE/GZIP HTTPS extensions Running at 99%: Surviving an Application DoS Ryan Huber Ryan Huber, Risk I/O Ryan first discussed various ways to do a denial of service (DoS) attack against web services. One usual method is to find a slow web page and do several wgets. Or download large files. Apache is not well suited at handling a large number of connections, but one can put something in front of it Can use Apache alternatives, such as nginx How to identify malicious hosts short, sudden web requests user-agent is obvious (curl, python) same url requested repeatedly no web page referer (not normal) hidden links. hide a link and see if a bot gets it restricted access if not your geo IP (unless the website is global) missing common headers in request regular timing first seen IP at beginning of attack count requests per hosts (usually a very large number) Use of captcha can mitigate attacks, but you'll lose a lot of genuine users. Bouncer, goo.gl/c2vyEc and www.github.com/rawdigits/Bouncer Bouncer is software written by Ryan in netflow. Bouncer has a small, unobtrusive footprint and detects DoS attempts. It closes blacklisted sockets immediately (not nice about it, no proper close connection). Aggregator collects requests and controls your web proxies. Need NTP on the front end web servers for clean data for use by bouncer. Bouncer is also useful for a popularity storm ("Slashdotting") and scraper storms. Future features: gzip collection data, documentation, consumer library, multitask, logging destroyed connections. Takeaways: DoS mitigation is easier with a complete picture Bouncer designed to make it easier to detect and defend DoS—not a complete cure Security Response in the Age of Mass Customized Attacks Peleus Uhley and Karthik Raman Peleus Uhley and Karthik Raman, Adobe ASSET, blogs.adobe.com/asset/ Peleus and Karthik talked about response to mass-customized exploits. Attackers behave much like a business. "Mass customization" refers to concept discussed in the book Future Perfect by Stan Davis of Harvard Business School. Mass customization is differentiating a product for an individual customer, but at a mass production price. For example, the same individual with a debit card receives basically the same customized ATM experience around the world. Or designing your own PC from commodity parts. Exploit kits are another example of mass customization. The kits support multiple browsers and plugins, allows new modules. Exploit kits are cheap and customizable. Organized gangs use exploit kits. A group at Berkeley looked at 77,000 malicious websites (Grier et al., "Manufacturing Compromise: The Emergence of Exploit-as-a-Service", 2012). They found 10,000 distinct binaries among them, but derived from only a dozen or so exploit kits. Characteristics of Mass Malware: potent, resilient, relatively low cost Technical characteristics: multiple OS, multipe payloads, multiple scenarios, multiple languages, obfuscation Response time for 0-day exploits has gone down from ~40 days 5 years ago to about ~10 days now. So the drive with malware is towards mass customized exploits, to avoid detection There's plenty of evicence that exploit development has Project Manager bureaucracy. They infer from the malware edicts to: support all versions of reader support all versions of windows support all versions of flash support all browsers write large complex, difficult to main code (8750 lines of JavaScript for example Exploits have "loose coupling" of multipe versions of software (adobe), OS, and browser. This allows specific attacks against specific versions of multiple pieces of software. Also allows exploits of more obscure software/OS/browsers and obscure versions. Gave examples of exploits that exploited 2, 3, 6, or 14 separate bugs. However, these complete exploits are more likely to be buggy or fragile in themselves and easier to defeat. Future research includes normalizing malware and Javascript. Conclusion: The coming trend is that mass-malware with mass zero-day attacks will result in mass customization of attacks. x86 Rewriting: Defeating RoP and other Shinanighans Richard Wartell Richard Wartell The attack vector we are addressing here is: First some malware causes a buffer overflow. The malware has no program access, but input access and buffer overflow code onto stack Later the stack became non-executable. The workaround malware used was to write a bogus return address to the stack jumping to malware Later came ASLR (Address Space Layout Randomization) to randomize memory layout and make addresses non-deterministic. The workaround malware used was to jump t existing code segments in the program that can be used in bad ways "RoP" is Return-oriented Programming attacks. RoP attacks use your own code and write return address on stack to (existing) expoitable code found in program ("gadgets"). Pinkie Pie was paid $60K last year for a RoP attack. One solution is using anti-RoP compilers that compile source code with NO return instructions. ASLR does not randomize address space, just "gadgets". IPR/ILR ("Instruction Location Randomization") randomizes each instruction with a virtual machine. Richard's goal was to randomize a binary with no source code access. He created "STIR" (Self-Transofrming Instruction Relocation). STIR disassembles binary and operates on "basic blocks" of code. The STIR disassembler is conservative in what to disassemble. Each basic block is moved to a random location in memory. Next, STIR writes new code sections with copies of "basic blocks" of code in randomized locations. The old code is copied and rewritten with jumps to new code. the original code sections in the file is marked non-executible. STIR has better entropy than ASLR in location of code. Makes brute force attacks much harder. STIR runs on MS Windows (PEM) and Linux (ELF). It eliminated 99.96% or more "gadgets" (i.e., moved the address). Overhead usually 5-10% on MS Windows, about 1.5-4% on Linux (but some code actually runs faster!). The unique thing about STIR is it requires no source access and the modified binary fully works! Current work is to rewrite code to enforce security policies. For example, don't create a *.{exe,msi,bat} file. Or don't connect to the network after reading from the disk. Clowntown Express: interesting bugs and running a bug bounty program Collin Greene Collin Greene, Facebook Collin talked about Facebook's bug bounty program. Background at FB: FB has good security frameworks, such as security teams, external audits, and cc'ing on diffs. But there's lots of "deep, dark, forgotten" parts of legacy FB code. Collin gave several examples of bountied bugs. Some bounty submissions were on software purchased from a third-party (but bounty claimers don't know and don't care). We use security questions, as does everyone else, but they are basically insecure (often easily discoverable). Collin didn't expect many bugs from the bounty program, but they ended getting 20+ good bugs in first 24 hours and good submissions continue to come in. Bug bounties bring people in with different perspectives, and are paid only for success. Bug bounty is a better use of a fixed amount of time and money versus just code review or static code analysis. The Bounty program started July 2011 and paid out $1.5 million to date. 14% of the submissions have been high priority problems that needed to be fixed immediately. The best bugs come from a small % of submitters (as with everything else)—the top paid submitters are paid 6 figures a year. Spammers like to backstab competitors. The youngest sumitter was 13. Some submitters have been hired. Bug bounties also allows to see bugs that were missed by tools or reviews, allowing improvement in the process. Bug bounties might not work for traditional software companies where the product has release cycle or is not on Internet. Active Fingerprinting of Encrypted VPNs Anna Shubina Anna Shubina, Dartmouth Institute for Security, Technology, and Society (I missed the start of her talk because another track went overtime. But I have the DVD of the talk, so I'll expand later) IPsec leaves fingerprints. Using netcat, one can easily visually distinguish various crypto chaining modes just from packet timing on a chart (example, DES-CBC versus AES-CBC) One can tell a lot about VPNs just from ping roundtrips (such as what router is used) Delayed packets are not informative about a network, especially if far away from the network More needed to explore about how TCP works in real life with respect to timing Making Attacks Go Backwards Fuzzynop FuzzyNop, Mandiant This talk is not about threat attribution (finding who), product solutions, politics, or sales pitches. But who are making these malware threats? It's not a single person or group—they have diverse skill levels. There's a lot of fat-fingered fumblers out there. Always look for low-hanging fruit first: "hiding" malware in the temp, recycle, or root directories creation of unnamed scheduled tasks obvious names of files and syscalls ("ClearEventLog") uncleared event logs. Clearing event log in itself, and time of clearing, is a red flag and good first clue to look for on a suspect system Reverse engineering is hard. Disassembler use takes practice and skill. A popular tool is IDA Pro, but it takes multiple interactive iterations to get a clean disassembly. Key loggers are used a lot in targeted attacks. They are typically custom code or built in a backdoor. A big tip-off is that non-printable characters need to be printed out (such as "[Ctrl]" "[RightShift]") or time stamp printf strings. Look for these in files. Presence is not proof they are used. Absence is not proof they are not used. Java exploits. Can parse jar file with idxparser.py and decomile Java file. Java typially used to target tech companies. Backdoors are the main persistence mechanism (provided externally) for malware. Also malware typically needs command and control. Application of Artificial Intelligence in Ad-Hoc Static Code Analysis John Ashaman John Ashaman, Security Innovation Initially John tried to analyze open source files with open source static analysis tools, but these showed thousands of false positives. Also tried using grep, but tis fails to find anything even mildly complex. So next John decided to write his own tool. His approach was to first generate a call graph then analyze the graph. However, the problem is that making a call graph is really hard. For example, one problem is "evil" coding techniques, such as passing function pointer. First the tool generated an Abstract Syntax Tree (AST) with the nodes created from method declarations and edges created from method use. Then the tool generated a control flow graph with the goal to find a path through the AST (a maze) from source to sink. The algorithm is to look at adjacent nodes to see if any are "scary" (a vulnerability), using heuristics for search order. The tool, called "Scat" (Static Code Analysis Tool), currently looks for C# vulnerabilities and some simple PHP. Later, he plans to add more PHP, then JSP and Java. For more information see his posts in Security Innovation blog and NRefactory on GitHub. Mask Your Checksums—The Gorry Details Eric (XlogicX) Davisson Eric (XlogicX) Davisson Sometimes in emailing or posting TCP/IP packets to analyze problems, you may want to mask the IP address. But to do this correctly, you need to mask the checksum too, or you'll leak information about the IP. Problem reports found in stackoverflow.com, sans.org, and pastebin.org are usually not masked, but a few companies do care. If only the IP is masked, the IP may be guessed from checksum (that is, it leaks data). Other parts of packet may leak more data about the IP. TCP and IP checksums both refer to the same data, so can get more bits of information out of using both checksums than just using one checksum. Also, one can usually determine the OS from the TTL field and ports in a packet header. If we get hundreds of possible results (16x each masked nibble that is unknown), one can do other things to narrow the results, such as look at packet contents for domain or geo information. With hundreds of results, can import as CSV format into a spreadsheet. Can corelate with geo data and see where each possibility is located. Eric then demoed a real email report with a masked IP packet attached. Was able to find the exact IP address, given the geo and university of the sender. Point is if you're going to mask a packet, do it right. Eric wouldn't usually bother, but do it correctly if at all, to not create a false impression of security. Adventures with weird machines thirty years after "Reflections on Trusting Trust" Sergey Bratus Sergey Bratus, Dartmouth College (and Julian Bangert and Rebecca Shapiro, not present) "Reflections on Trusting Trust" refers to Ken Thompson's classic 1984 paper. "You can't trust code that you did not totally create yourself." There's invisible links in the chain-of-trust, such as "well-installed microcode bugs" or in the compiler, and other planted bugs. Thompson showed how a compiler can introduce and propagate bugs in unmodified source. But suppose if there's no bugs and you trust the author, can you trust the code? Hell No! There's too many factors—it's Babylonian in nature. Why not? Well, Input is not well-defined/recognized (code's assumptions about "checked" input will be violated (bug/vunerabiliy). For example, HTML is recursive, but Regex checking is not recursive. Input well-formed but so complex there's no telling what it does For example, ELF file parsing is complex and has multiple ways of parsing. Input is seen differently by different pieces of program or toolchain Any Input is a program input executes on input handlers (drives state changes & transitions) only a well-defined execution model can be trusted (regex/DFA, PDA, CFG) Input handler either is a "recognizer" for the inputs as a well-defined language (see langsec.org) or it's a "virtual machine" for inputs to drive into pwn-age ELF ABI (UNIX/Linux executible file format) case study. Problems can arise from these steps (without planting bugs): compiler linker loader ld.so/rtld relocator DWARF (debugger info) exceptions The problem is you can't really automatically analyze code (it's the "halting problem" and undecidable). Only solution is to freeze code and sign it. But you can't freeze everything! Can't freeze ASLR or loading—must have tables and metadata. Any sufficiently complex input data is the same as VM byte code Example, ELF relocation entries + dynamic symbols == a Turing Complete Machine (TM). @bxsays created a Turing machine in Linux from relocation data (not code) in an ELF file. For more information, see Rebecca "bx" Shapiro's presentation from last year's Toorcon, "Programming Weird Machines with ELF Metadata" @bxsays did same thing with Mach-O bytecode Or a DWARF exception handling data .eh_frame + glibc == Turning Machine X86 MMU (IDT, GDT, TSS): used address translation to create a Turning Machine. Page handler reads and writes (on page fault) memory. Uses a page table, which can be used as Turning Machine byte code. Example on Github using this TM that will fly a glider across the screen Next Sergey talked about "Parser Differentials". That having one input format, but two parsers, will create confusion and opportunity for exploitation. For example, CSRs are parsed during creation by cert requestor and again by another parser at the CA. Another example is ELF—several parsers in OS tool chain, which are all different. Can have two different Program Headers (PHDRs) because ld.so parses multiple PHDRs. The second PHDR can completely transform the executable. This is described in paper in the first issue of International Journal of PoC. Conclusions trusting computers not only about bugs! Bugs are part of a problem, but no by far all of it complex data formats means bugs no "chain of trust" in Babylon! (that is, with parser differentials) we need to squeeze complexity out of data until data stops being "code equivalent" Further information See and langsec.org. USENIX WOOT 2013 (Workshop on Offensive Technologies) for "weird machines" papers and videos.

    Read the article

  • Setting up a new Silverlight 4 Project with WCF RIA Services

    - by Kevin Grossnicklaus
    Many of my clients are actively using Silverlight 4 and RIA Services to build powerful line of business applications.  Getting things set up correctly is critical to being to being able to take full advantage of the RIA services plumbing and when developers struggle with the setup they tend to shy away from the solution as a whole.  I’m a big proponent of RIA services and wanted to take the opportunity to share some of my experiences in setting up these types of projects.  In late 2010 I presented a RIA Services Master Class here in St. Louis, MO through my firm (ArchitectNow) and the information shared in this post was promised during that presentation. One other thing I want to mention before diving in is the existence of a number of other great posts on this subject.  I’ve learned a lot from many of them and wanted to call out a few of them.  The purpose of my post is to point out some of the gotchas that people get caught up on in the process but I would still encourage you to do as much additional research as you can to find the perfect setup for your needs. Here are a few additional blog posts and articles you should check out on the subject: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ee707351(VS.91).aspx http://adam-thompson.com/post/2010/07/03/Getting-Started-with-WCF-RIA-Services-for-Silverlight-4.aspx Technologies I don’t intend for this post to turn into a full WCF RIA Services tutorial but I did want to point out what technologies we will be using: Visual Studio.NET 2010 Silverlight 4.0 WCF RIA Services for Visual Studio 2010 Entity Framework 4.0 I also wanted to point out that the screenshots came from my personal development box which has a number of additional plug-ins and frameworks loaded so a few of the screenshots might not match 100% with what you see on your own machines. If you do not have Visual Studio 2010 you can download the express version from http://www.microsoft.com/express.  The Silverlight 4.0 tools and the WCF RIA Services components are installed via the Web Platform Installer (http://www.microsoft.com/web/download). Also, the examples given in this post are done in C#…sorry to you VB folks but the concepts are 100% identical. Setting up anew RIA Services Project This section will provide a step-by-step walkthrough of setting up a new RIA services project using a shared DLL for server side code and a simple Entity Framework model for data access.  All projects are created with the consistent ArchitectNow.RIAServices filename prefix and default namespace.  This would be modified to match your companies standards. First, open Visual Studio and open the new project window via File->New->Project.  In the New Project window, select the Silverlight folder in the Installed Templates section on the left and select “Silverlight Application” as your project type.  Verify your solution name and location are set appropriately.  Note that the project name we specified in the example below ends with .Client.  This indicates the name which will be given to our Silverlight project. I consider Silverlight a client-side technology and thus use this name to reflect that.  Click Ok to continue. During the creation on a new Silverlight 4 project you will be prompted with the following dialog to create a new web ASP.NET web project to host your Silverlight content.  As we are demonstrating the setup of a WCF RIA Services infrastructure, make sure the “Enable WCF RIA Services” option is checked and click OK.  Obviously, there are some other options here which have an effect on your solution and you are welcome to look around.  For our example we are going to leave the ASP.NET Web Application Project selected.  If you are interested in having your Silverlight project hosted in an MVC 2 application or a Web Site project these options are available as well.  Also, whichever web project type you select, the name can be modified here as well.  Note that it defaults to the same name as your Silverlight project with the addition of a .Web suffix. At this point, your full Silverlight 4 project and host ASP.NET Web Application should be created and will now display in your Visual Studio solution explorer as part of a single Visual Studio solution as follows: Now we want to add our WCF RIA Services projects to this same solution.  To do so, right-click on the Solution node in the solution explorer and select Add->New Project.  In the New Project dialog again select the Silverlight folder under the Visual C# node on the left and, in the main area of the screen, select the WCF RIA Services Class Library project template as shown below.  Make sure your project name is set appropriately as well.  For the sample below, we will name the project “ArchitectNow.RIAServices.Server.Entities”.   The .Server.Entities suffix we use is meant to simply indicate that this particular project will contain our WCF RIA Services entity classes (as you will see below).  Click OK to continue. Once you have created the WCF RIA Services Class Library specified above, Visual Studio will automatically add TWO projects to your solution.  The first will be an project called .Server.Entities (using our naming conventions) and the other will have the same name with a .Web extension.  The full solution (with all 4 projects) is shown in the image below.  The .Entities project will essentially remain empty and is actually a Silverlight 4 class library that will contain generated RIA Services domain objects.  It will be referenced by our front-end Silverlight project and thus allow for simplified sharing of code between the client and the server.   The .Entities.Web project is a .NET 4.0 class library into which we will put our data access code (via Entity Framework).  This is our server side code and business logic and the RIA Services plumbing will maintain a link between this project and the front end.  Specific entities such as our domain objects and other code we set to be shared will be copied automatically into the .Entities project to be used in both the front end and the back end. At this point, we want to do a little cleanup of the projects in our solution and we will do so by deleting the “Class1.cs” class from both the .Entities project and the .Entities.Web project.  (Has anyone ever intentionally named a class “Class1”?) Next, we need to configure a few references to make RIA Services work.  THIS IS A KEY STEP THAT CAUSES MANY HEADACHES FOR DEVELOPERS NEW TO THIS INFRASTRUCTURE! Using the Add References dialog in Visual Studio, add a project reference from the *.Client project (our Silverlight 4 client) to the *.Entities project (our RIA Services class library).  Next, again using the Add References dialog in Visual Studio, add a project reference from the *.Client.Web project (our ASP.NET host project) to the *.Entities.Web project (our back-end data services DLL).  To get to the Add References dialog, simply right-click on the project you with to add a reference to in the Visual Studio solution explorer and select “Add Reference” from the resulting context menu.  You will want to make sure these references are added as “Project” references to simplify your future debugging.  To reiterate the reference direction using the project names we have utilized in this example thus far:  .Client references .Entities and .Client.Web reference .Entities.Web.  If you have opted for a different naming convention, then the Silverlight project must reference the RIA Services Silverlight class library and the ASP.NET host project must reference the server-side class library. Next, we are going to add a new Entity Framework data model to our data services project (.Entities.Web).  We will do this by right clicking on this project (ArchitectNow.Server.Entities.Web in the above diagram) and selecting Add->New Project.  In the New Project dialog we will select ADO.NET Entity Data Model as in the following diagram.  For now we will call this simply SampleDataModel.edmx and click OK. It is worth pointing out that WCF RIA Services is in no way tied to the Entity Framework as a means of accessing data and any data access technology is supported (as long as the server side implementation maps to the RIA Services pattern which is a topic beyond the scope of this post).  We are using EF to quickly demonstrate the RIA Services concepts and setup infrastructure, as such, I am not providing a database schema with this post but am instead connecting to a small sample database on my local machine.  The following diagram shows a simple EF Data Model with two tables that I reverse engineered from a local data store.   If you are putting together your own solution, feel free to reverse engineer a few tables from any local database to which you have access. At this point, once you have an EF data model generated as an EDMX into your .Entites.Web project YOU MUST BUILD YOUR SOLUTION.  I know it seems strange to call that out but it important that the solution be built at this point for the next step to be successful.  Obviously, if you have any build errors, these must be addressed at this point. At this point we will add a RIA Services Domain Service to our .Entities.Web project (our server side code).  We will need to right-click on the .Entities.Web project and select Add->New Item.  In the Add New Item dialog, select Domain Service Class and verify the name of your new Domain Service is correct (ours is called SampleService.cs in the image below).  Next, click "Add”. After clicking “Add” to include the Domain Service Class in the selected project, you will be presented with the following dialog.  In it, you can choose which entities from the selected EDMX to include in your services and if they should be allowed to be edited (i.e. inserted, updated, or deleted) via this service.  If the “Available DataContext/ObjectContext classes” dropdown is empty, this indicates you have not yes successfully built your project after adding your EDMX.  I would also recommend verifying that the “Generate associated classes for metadata” option is selected.  Once you have selected the appropriate options, click “OK”. Once you have added the domain service class to the .Entities.Web project, the resulting solution should look similar to the following: Note that in the solution you now have a SampleDataModel.edmx which represents your EF data mapping to your database and a SampleService.cs which will contain a large amount of generated RIA Services code which RIA Services utilizes to access this data from the Silverlight front-end.  You will put all your server side data access code and logic into the SampleService.cs class.  The SampleService.metadata.cs class is for decorating the generated domain objects with attributes from the System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations namespace for validation purposes. FINAL AND KEY CONFIGURATION STEP!  One key step that causes significant headache to developers configuring RIA Services for the first time is the fact that, when we added the EDMX to the .Entities.Web project for our EF data access, a connection string was generated and placed within a newly generated App.Context file within that project.  While we didn’t point it out at the time you can see it in the image above.  This connection string will be required for the EF data model to successfully locate it’s data.  Also, when we added the Domain Service class to the .Entities.Web project, a number of RIA Services configuration options were added to the same App.Config file.   Unfortunately, when we ultimately begin to utilize the RIA Services infrastructure, our Silverlight UI will be making RIA services calls through the ASP.NET host project (i.e. .Client.Web).  This host project has a reference to the .Entities.Web project which actually contains the code so all will pass through correctly EXCEPT the fact that the host project will utilize it’s own Web.Config for any configuration settings.  For this reason we must now merge all the sections of the App.Config file in the .Entities.Web project into the Web.Config file in the .Client.Web project.  I know this is a bit tedious and I wish there were a simpler solution but it is required for our RIA Services Domain Service to be made available to the front end Silverlight project.  Much of this manual merge can be achieved by simply cutting and pasting from App.Config into Web.Config.  Unfortunately, the <system.webServer> section will exist in both and the contents of this section will need to be manually merged.  Fortunately, this is a step that needs to be taken only once per solution.  As you add additional data structures and Domain Services methods to the server no additional changes will be necessary to the Web.Config. Next Steps At this point, we have walked through the basic setup of a simple RIA services solution.  Unfortunately, there is still a lot to know about RIA services and we have not even begun to take advantage of the plumbing which we just configured (meaning we haven’t even made a single RIA services call).  I plan on posting a few more introductory posts over the next few weeks to take us to this step.  If you have any questions on the content in this post feel free to reach out to me via this Blog and I’ll gladly point you in (hopefully) the right direction. Resources Prior to closing out this post, I wanted to share a number or resources to help you get started with RIA services.  While I plan on posting more on the subject, I didn’t invent any of this stuff and wanted to give credit to the following areas for helping me put a lot of these pieces into place.   The books and online resources below will go a long way to making you extremely productive with RIA services in the shortest time possible.  The only thing required of you is the dedication to take advantage of the resources available. Books Pro Business Applications with Silverlight 4 http://www.amazon.com/Pro-Business-Applications-Silverlight-4/dp/1430272074/ref=sr_1_2?ie=UTF8&qid=1291048751&sr=8-2 Silverlight 4 in Action http://www.amazon.com/Silverlight-4-Action-Pete-Brown/dp/1935182374/ref=sr_1_1?ie=UTF8&qid=1291048751&sr=8-1 Pro Silverlight for the Enterprise (Books for Professionals by Professionals) http://www.amazon.com/Pro-Silverlight-Enterprise-Books-Professionals/dp/1430218673/ref=sr_1_3?ie=UTF8&qid=1291048751&sr=8-3 Web Content RIA Services http://channel9.msdn.com/Blogs/RobBagby/NET-RIA-Services-in-5-Minutes http://silverlight.net/riaservices/ http://www.silverlight.net/learn/videos/all/net-ria-services-intro/ http://www.silverlight.net/learn/videos/all/ria-services-support-visual-studio-2010/ http://channel9.msdn.com/learn/courses/Silverlight4/SL4BusinessModule2/SL4LOB_02_01_RIAServices http://www.myvbprof.com/MainSite/index.aspx#/zSL4_RIA_01 http://channel9.msdn.com/blogs/egibson/silverlight-firestarter-ria-services http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ee707336%28v=VS.91%29.aspx Silverlight www.silverlight.net http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/silverlight4trainingcourse.aspx http://channel9.msdn.com/shows/silverlighttv

    Read the article

  • C#/.NET Little Wonders: The Concurrent Collections (1 of 3)

    - by James Michael Hare
    Once again we consider some of the lesser known classes and keywords of C#.  In the next few weeks, we will discuss the concurrent collections and how they have changed the face of concurrent programming. This week’s post will begin with a general introduction and discuss the ConcurrentStack<T> and ConcurrentQueue<T>.  Then in the following post we’ll discuss the ConcurrentDictionary<T> and ConcurrentBag<T>.  Finally, we shall close on the third post with a discussion of the BlockingCollection<T>. For more of the "Little Wonders" posts, see the index here. A brief history of collections In the beginning was the .NET 1.0 Framework.  And out of this framework emerged the System.Collections namespace, and it was good.  It contained all the basic things a growing programming language needs like the ArrayList and Hashtable collections.  The main problem, of course, with these original collections is that they held items of type object which means you had to be disciplined enough to use them correctly or you could end up with runtime errors if you got an object of a type you weren't expecting. Then came .NET 2.0 and generics and our world changed forever!  With generics the C# language finally got an equivalent of the very powerful C++ templates.  As such, the System.Collections.Generic was born and we got type-safe versions of all are favorite collections.  The List<T> succeeded the ArrayList and the Dictionary<TKey,TValue> succeeded the Hashtable and so on.  The new versions of the library were not only safer because they checked types at compile-time, in many cases they were more performant as well.  So much so that it's Microsoft's recommendation that the System.Collections original collections only be used for backwards compatibility. So we as developers came to know and love the generic collections and took them into our hearts and embraced them.  The problem is, thread safety in both the original collections and the generic collections can be problematic, for very different reasons. Now, if you are only doing single-threaded development you may not care – after all, no locking is required.  Even if you do have multiple threads, if a collection is “load-once, read-many” you don’t need to do anything to protect that container from multi-threaded access, as illustrated below: 1: public static class OrderTypeTranslator 2: { 3: // because this dictionary is loaded once before it is ever accessed, we don't need to synchronize 4: // multi-threaded read access 5: private static readonly Dictionary<string, char> _translator = new Dictionary<string, char> 6: { 7: {"New", 'N'}, 8: {"Update", 'U'}, 9: {"Cancel", 'X'} 10: }; 11:  12: // the only public interface into the dictionary is for reading, so inherently thread-safe 13: public static char? Translate(string orderType) 14: { 15: char charValue; 16: if (_translator.TryGetValue(orderType, out charValue)) 17: { 18: return charValue; 19: } 20:  21: return null; 22: } 23: } Unfortunately, most of our computer science problems cannot get by with just single-threaded applications or with multi-threading in a load-once manner.  Looking at  today's trends, it's clear to see that computers are not so much getting faster because of faster processor speeds -- we've nearly reached the limits we can push through with today's technologies -- but more because we're adding more cores to the boxes.  With this new hardware paradigm, it is even more important to use multi-threaded applications to take full advantage of parallel processing to achieve higher application speeds. So let's look at how to use collections in a thread-safe manner. Using historical collections in a concurrent fashion The early .NET collections (System.Collections) had a Synchronized() static method that could be used to wrap the early collections to make them completely thread-safe.  This paradigm was dropped in the generic collections (System.Collections.Generic) because having a synchronized wrapper resulted in atomic locks for all operations, which could prove overkill in many multithreading situations.  Thus the paradigm shifted to having the user of the collection specify their own locking, usually with an external object: 1: public class OrderAggregator 2: { 3: private static readonly Dictionary<string, List<Order>> _orders = new Dictionary<string, List<Order>>(); 4: private static readonly _orderLock = new object(); 5:  6: public void Add(string accountNumber, Order newOrder) 7: { 8: List<Order> ordersForAccount; 9:  10: // a complex operation like this should all be protected 11: lock (_orderLock) 12: { 13: if (!_orders.TryGetValue(accountNumber, out ordersForAccount)) 14: { 15: _orders.Add(accountNumber, ordersForAccount = new List<Order>()); 16: } 17:  18: ordersForAccount.Add(newOrder); 19: } 20: } 21: } Notice how we’re performing several operations on the dictionary under one lock.  With the Synchronized() static methods of the early collections, you wouldn’t be able to specify this level of locking (a more macro-level).  So in the generic collections, it was decided that if a user needed synchronization, they could implement their own locking scheme instead so that they could provide synchronization as needed. The need for better concurrent access to collections Here’s the problem: it’s relatively easy to write a collection that locks itself down completely for access, but anything more complex than that can be difficult and error-prone to write, and much less to make it perform efficiently!  For example, what if you have a Dictionary that has frequent reads but in-frequent updates?  Do you want to lock down the entire Dictionary for every access?  This would be overkill and would prevent concurrent reads.  In such cases you could use something like a ReaderWriterLockSlim which allows for multiple readers in a lock, and then once a writer grabs the lock it blocks all further readers until the writer is done (in a nutshell).  This is all very complex stuff to consider. Fortunately, this is where the Concurrent Collections come in.  The Parallel Computing Platform team at Microsoft went through great pains to determine how to make a set of concurrent collections that would have the best performance characteristics for general case multi-threaded use. Now, as in all things involving threading, you should always make sure you evaluate all your container options based on the particular usage scenario and the degree of parallelism you wish to acheive. This article should not be taken to understand that these collections are always supperior to the generic collections. Each fills a particular need for a particular situation. Understanding what each container is optimized for is key to the success of your application whether it be single-threaded or multi-threaded. General points to consider with the concurrent collections The MSDN points out that the concurrent collections all support the ICollection interface. However, since the collections are already synchronized, the IsSynchronized property always returns false, and SyncRoot always returns null.  Thus you should not attempt to use these properties for synchronization purposes. Note that since the concurrent collections also may have different operations than the traditional data structures you may be used to.  Now you may ask why they did this, but it was done out of necessity to keep operations safe and atomic.  For example, in order to do a Pop() on a stack you have to know the stack is non-empty, but between the time you check the stack’s IsEmpty property and then do the Pop() another thread may have come in and made the stack empty!  This is why some of the traditional operations have been changed to make them safe for concurrent use. In addition, some properties and methods in the concurrent collections achieve concurrency by creating a snapshot of the collection, which means that some operations that were traditionally O(1) may now be O(n) in the concurrent models.  I’ll try to point these out as we talk about each collection so you can be aware of any potential performance impacts.  Finally, all the concurrent containers are safe for enumeration even while being modified, but some of the containers support this in different ways (snapshot vs. dirty iteration).  Once again I’ll highlight how thread-safe enumeration works for each collection. ConcurrentStack<T>: The thread-safe LIFO container The ConcurrentStack<T> is the thread-safe counterpart to the System.Collections.Generic.Stack<T>, which as you may remember is your standard last-in-first-out container.  If you think of algorithms that favor stack usage (for example, depth-first searches of graphs and trees) then you can see how using a thread-safe stack would be of benefit. The ConcurrentStack<T> achieves thread-safe access by using System.Threading.Interlocked operations.  This means that the multi-threaded access to the stack requires no traditional locking and is very, very fast! For the most part, the ConcurrentStack<T> behaves like it’s Stack<T> counterpart with a few differences: Pop() was removed in favor of TryPop() Returns true if an item existed and was popped and false if empty. PushRange() and TryPopRange() were added Allows you to push multiple items and pop multiple items atomically. Count takes a snapshot of the stack and then counts the items. This means it is a O(n) operation, if you just want to check for an empty stack, call IsEmpty instead which is O(1). ToArray() and GetEnumerator() both also take snapshots. This means that iteration over a stack will give you a static view at the time of the call and will not reflect updates. Pushing on a ConcurrentStack<T> works just like you’d expect except for the aforementioned PushRange() method that was added to allow you to push a range of items concurrently. 1: var stack = new ConcurrentStack<string>(); 2:  3: // adding to stack is much the same as before 4: stack.Push("First"); 5:  6: // but you can also push multiple items in one atomic operation (no interleaves) 7: stack.PushRange(new [] { "Second", "Third", "Fourth" }); For looking at the top item of the stack (without removing it) the Peek() method has been removed in favor of a TryPeek().  This is because in order to do a peek the stack must be non-empty, but between the time you check for empty and the time you execute the peek the stack contents may have changed.  Thus the TryPeek() was created to be an atomic check for empty, and then peek if not empty: 1: // to look at top item of stack without removing it, can use TryPeek. 2: // Note that there is no Peek(), this is because you need to check for empty first. TryPeek does. 3: string item; 4: if (stack.TryPeek(out item)) 5: { 6: Console.WriteLine("Top item was " + item); 7: } 8: else 9: { 10: Console.WriteLine("Stack was empty."); 11: } Finally, to remove items from the stack, we have the TryPop() for single, and TryPopRange() for multiple items.  Just like the TryPeek(), these operations replace Pop() since we need to ensure atomically that the stack is non-empty before we pop from it: 1: // to remove items, use TryPop or TryPopRange to get multiple items atomically (no interleaves) 2: if (stack.TryPop(out item)) 3: { 4: Console.WriteLine("Popped " + item); 5: } 6:  7: // TryPopRange will only pop up to the number of spaces in the array, the actual number popped is returned. 8: var poppedItems = new string[2]; 9: int numPopped = stack.TryPopRange(poppedItems); 10:  11: foreach (var theItem in poppedItems.Take(numPopped)) 12: { 13: Console.WriteLine("Popped " + theItem); 14: } Finally, note that as stated before, GetEnumerator() and ToArray() gets a snapshot of the data at the time of the call.  That means if you are enumerating the stack you will get a snapshot of the stack at the time of the call.  This is illustrated below: 1: var stack = new ConcurrentStack<string>(); 2:  3: // adding to stack is much the same as before 4: stack.Push("First"); 5:  6: var results = stack.GetEnumerator(); 7:  8: // but you can also push multiple items in one atomic operation (no interleaves) 9: stack.PushRange(new [] { "Second", "Third", "Fourth" }); 10:  11: while(results.MoveNext()) 12: { 13: Console.WriteLine("Stack only has: " + results.Current); 14: } The only item that will be printed out in the above code is "First" because the snapshot was taken before the other items were added. This may sound like an issue, but it’s really for safety and is more correct.  You don’t want to enumerate a stack and have half a view of the stack before an update and half a view of the stack after an update, after all.  In addition, note that this is still thread-safe, whereas iterating through a non-concurrent collection while updating it in the old collections would cause an exception. ConcurrentQueue<T>: The thread-safe FIFO container The ConcurrentQueue<T> is the thread-safe counterpart of the System.Collections.Generic.Queue<T> class.  The concurrent queue uses an underlying list of small arrays and lock-free System.Threading.Interlocked operations on the head and tail arrays.  Once again, this allows us to do thread-safe operations without the need for heavy locks! The ConcurrentQueue<T> (like the ConcurrentStack<T>) has some departures from the non-concurrent counterpart.  Most notably: Dequeue() was removed in favor of TryDequeue(). Returns true if an item existed and was dequeued and false if empty. Count does not take a snapshot It subtracts the head and tail index to get the count.  This results overall in a O(1) complexity which is quite good.  It’s still recommended, however, that for empty checks you call IsEmpty instead of comparing Count to zero. ToArray() and GetEnumerator() both take snapshots. This means that iteration over a queue will give you a static view at the time of the call and will not reflect updates. The Enqueue() method on the ConcurrentQueue<T> works much the same as the generic Queue<T>: 1: var queue = new ConcurrentQueue<string>(); 2:  3: // adding to queue is much the same as before 4: queue.Enqueue("First"); 5: queue.Enqueue("Second"); 6: queue.Enqueue("Third"); For front item access, the TryPeek() method must be used to attempt to see the first item if the queue.  There is no Peek() method since, as you’ll remember, we can only peek on a non-empty queue, so we must have an atomic TryPeek() that checks for empty and then returns the first item if the queue is non-empty. 1: // to look at first item in queue without removing it, can use TryPeek. 2: // Note that there is no Peek(), this is because you need to check for empty first. TryPeek does. 3: string item; 4: if (queue.TryPeek(out item)) 5: { 6: Console.WriteLine("First item was " + item); 7: } 8: else 9: { 10: Console.WriteLine("Queue was empty."); 11: } Then, to remove items you use TryDequeue().  Once again this is for the same reason we have TryPeek() and not Peek(): 1: // to remove items, use TryDequeue. If queue is empty returns false. 2: if (queue.TryDequeue(out item)) 3: { 4: Console.WriteLine("Dequeued first item " + item); 5: } Just like the concurrent stack, the ConcurrentQueue<T> takes a snapshot when you call ToArray() or GetEnumerator() which means that subsequent updates to the queue will not be seen when you iterate over the results.  Thus once again the code below will only show the first item, since the other items were added after the snapshot. 1: var queue = new ConcurrentQueue<string>(); 2:  3: // adding to queue is much the same as before 4: queue.Enqueue("First"); 5:  6: var iterator = queue.GetEnumerator(); 7:  8: queue.Enqueue("Second"); 9: queue.Enqueue("Third"); 10:  11: // only shows First 12: while (iterator.MoveNext()) 13: { 14: Console.WriteLine("Dequeued item " + iterator.Current); 15: } Using collections concurrently You’ll notice in the examples above I stuck to using single-threaded examples so as to make them deterministic and the results obvious.  Of course, if we used these collections in a truly multi-threaded way the results would be less deterministic, but would still be thread-safe and with no locking on your part required! For example, say you have an order processor that takes an IEnumerable<Order> and handles each other in a multi-threaded fashion, then groups the responses together in a concurrent collection for aggregation.  This can be done easily with the TPL’s Parallel.ForEach(): 1: public static IEnumerable<OrderResult> ProcessOrders(IEnumerable<Order> orderList) 2: { 3: var proxy = new OrderProxy(); 4: var results = new ConcurrentQueue<OrderResult>(); 5:  6: // notice that we can process all these in parallel and put the results 7: // into our concurrent collection without needing any external locking! 8: Parallel.ForEach(orderList, 9: order => 10: { 11: var result = proxy.PlaceOrder(order); 12:  13: results.Enqueue(result); 14: }); 15:  16: return results; 17: } Summary Obviously, if you do not need multi-threaded safety, you don’t need to use these collections, but when you do need multi-threaded collections these are just the ticket! The plethora of features (I always think of the movie The Three Amigos when I say plethora) built into these containers and the amazing way they acheive thread-safe access in an efficient manner is wonderful to behold. Stay tuned next week where we’ll continue our discussion with the ConcurrentBag<T> and the ConcurrentDictionary<TKey,TValue>. For some excellent information on the performance of the concurrent collections and how they perform compared to a traditional brute-force locking strategy, see this wonderful whitepaper by the Microsoft Parallel Computing Platform team here.   Tweet Technorati Tags: C#,.NET,Concurrent Collections,Collections,Multi-Threading,Little Wonders,BlackRabbitCoder,James Michael Hare

    Read the article

  • top tweets WebLogic Partner Community – June 2012

    - by JuergenKress
    Send your tweets @wlscommunity #WebLogicCommunity and follow us at http://twitter.com/wlscommunity OTNArchBeat? Free Virtual Developer Day: Oracle ADF and Oracle Fusion Middleware Development http://bit.ly/MxuNAg AMIS, Oracle & Java? Checklist veearts nu ook op iPad. @amis_services Mobile integratie met Oracle Fusion Middleware http://dld.bz/buwsM #OSB #SOA WhitehorsesWhiteblog: Troubleshoot JVM crashes of Weblogic: CompilerThread (http://bit.ly/KcGzZK) Jon petter hjulstad E-vita is now Apps Grid Specialized! ODTUG Fusion Middleware Sessions RT @OTNArchBeat: ODTUG Kscope12 - June 24-28 - San Antonio, TX http://bit.ly/LlWkNV OTNArchBeat? Free Event: Modern #Java Development, in/outside the Enterprise - May 30 - Redwood Shores, CA http://bit.ly/LfB79a ADF Community DE? Oracle Advanced ADF 11g Partner Workshop Düsseldorf /Germany (english) June 26-29, click here to see Nicolas Lorain? Best Practices for #JavaFX 2 Enterprise Applications (Part Two) http://buff.ly/Lk1DBn by Jim Weaver shay shmeltzer? #Oracle Developers in #Israel - don't miss the free #ADF workshop July 2nd - get hands-on with Oracle ADF -here OTNArchBeat? Java at JAXconf | Tori Wieldt http://bit.ly/LdoLS2 Anand Akela? #Oracle Customers and Partners – Get your free pass to @CloudExpo in New York, June 11 to 14, http://goo.gl/RpYFT <- Stop by booth #511 OracleSupport_WLS? Did you know that since 3/15/12 #WebLogic Server 12.1.1.0 is certified for production with JDK 7? http://bit.ly/IYJE0L Sharat? Highly useful #JavaFX best practices blog by @JavaFXpert More details here ADF EMG How to set up a productive ADF Dev Env - discussion started by @baigsorcl. Click here to Read and comment. OracleSupport_WLS Upcoming #webcast: Diagnosing #weblogic performance issues through #java thread dumps http://bit.ly/M4O9qF My Oracle Support? New to Oracle Support? - Webcast on Support Basics webcast May 22 10:30 Central Europe. Register @ http://bit.ly/J8o0WG Mohamad Afshar? Cloud Expo – Oracle Customers and Partners – get your free pass to Cloud Expo in New York, June 11 to 14, http://goo.gl/RpYFT OTNArchBeat Oracle VM 3.1 is here | @Ronenkofman http://bit.ly/JriWTq Oracle Exalogic? RT @D0uglasPhillips: ExalogicTV New Video Introducing Oracle Secure Global Desktop for #Exalogic!! http://bit.ly/nwkrCu OracleBlogs? Java EE6 and WebLogic YouTube video channels http://ow.ly/1jVcYJ Oracle WebLogic RT @aleftik: Excited to spend some time today playing around with the WebSockets SDK http://bit.ly/NoTtri WebLogic Community Java EE6 and WebLogic YouTube video channels http://wp.me/p1LMIb-h0 OracleSupport_WLS New tutorial! How to use the #JMS #API to create a message producer with #GlassFish and #NetBeans http://bit.ly/Juqjn JDeveloper & ADF? Tip when installing JDeveloper 11.1.2.2.0 version http://dlvr.it/1b48s1 WebLogic Community Middleware Oracle Excellence Awards 2012 – HAPPY NEW YEAR! Click here to read WebLogicCommunity #opn #oracle#Specialization #opnaward Steven Davelaar? Improve performance of your ADF app using lazy, on-demand querying of detail view objects: Click here OracleBlogs? Middleware Oracle Excellence Awards 2012 & HAPPY NEW YEAR! http://ow.ly/1kahzZ OracleSupport_WLS Upgrading from #weblogic 9.2.x to 10.3.x? http://bit.ly/Kqzl9N AMIS, Oracle & Java “@JDeveloper: Logout from an ADF application http://dlvr.it/1fQBnm” WebLogic Community UK OUG call for papers–your middleware success! Click here #UKOUG #soacommunity #OPN Whitehorses Whiteblog: Enterprise Manager: Manage your Fusion Middleware logfiles (http://bit.ly/KQlZkR) WebLogic Community? @Jphjulstad HI Jon, should we send Pizza when you go in production with your WebLogic 12c project? Whish you success! #WebLogicCommunity Sabine Leitner ADF Einsteigerworkshops je 2 Tage im Juni in HAM, BLN, HANN #Oracle #WLS http://bit.ly/LcOIzB @OracleWebLogic @OracleAppGrid@soacommunity Andreas Koop new post Java Heap Monitor in JDeveloper http://bit.ly/LgSk85 Sabine Leitner? #Oracle Kundentag mit Vorträgen von Sparkasse, Schufa, LBBW, Allianz über FMW & Exa Lösungen! 21.06. FRA http://bit.ly/JtwE3v @wlscommunity NetBeans Team RT @chadlung: Installing and configuring #NetBeans 7.1.2 and the #Java JDK 1.7 on OS X: http://www.giantflyingsaucer.com/blog/p=3760 #osx WebLogic Community Happy New Year #WeblogicCommunity thanks for the business! Time for a drink http://pic.twitter.com/K34KFbvH WebLogic Community UK OUG call for papers&ndash;your middleware success! http://wp.me/p1LMIb-gU WebLogic Community? Middleware Oracle Excellence Awards 2012 - HAPPY NEW YEAR! http://wp.me/p1LMIb-h6 Oracle WebLogic? RT @wlscommunity: WebLogic World Record Two Processor Result with SPECjEnterprise2010 Benchmark Click here to read #weblogic #sunfire #li Marc? Relocate wlst script for all the logfiles in your domain @wlscommunity, http://tinyurl.com/btbjcco WebLogic Community WebLogic World Record Two Processor Result with SPECjEnterprise2010 Benchmark Click here #WebLogicCommunity #weblogic #sunfire Oracle WebLogic MIss a WebLogic Devcast webinar? Catch any of the replays in the series on-demand! #WebLogic #JavaEE #coherence http://bit.ly/LNGa4p JDeveloper & ADF? Bean DataControl - Edit table records http://dlvr.it/1ZWqCx Justin Kestelyn? Contents of "Virtual Developer Day: Java SE 7 and JavaFX 2.0" are now avail on demand; no reg http://tinyurl.com/78nxnyo Frank Nimphius? Preparing 12c new features for DOAG 2012 Development - June 14th in Bonn (http://development.doag.org) WebLogic Community? Middleware Oracle Excellence Awards 2012&ndash;HAPPY NEW YEAR! http://wp.me/p1LMIb-he JDeveloper & ADF Placeholder Watermarks with ADF 11.1.2 http://dlvr.it/1ZWDc9 Oracle ACE Program? May edition #ACE newsletter now available online. http://bit.ly/LKA2de chriscmuir New blog post: Which JDeveloper is right for me? http://bit.ly/J8sj9e GlassFish? Transactional Interceptors in Java EE 7 - Request for feedback: Linda described how EJB's container-managed tr http://bit.ly/KKuGNJ OracleEnterpriseMgr Oracle Application Testing Suite 12.1 Debuts at StarEast 2012 http://ow.ly/aXcv8 #em12c JAX London First set of speaker session announced for #JAXLondon see: http://bit.ly/L0HSME OTNArchBeat? Oracle Cloud Conference: dates and locations worldwide http://bit.ly/JgNeID NetBeans Team? Video: Create and debug a TestNG test class in #NetBeans IDE: http://ow.ly/b7NEW NetBeans Team #NetBeans tip: Code Template for #Kohana #PHP Framework: http://ow.ly/aWIvY Robin? Started to use the #Oracle #WebLogic Server #Maven Plugin. Really awesome to install a complete #WLS with "mvn wls:install" !@wlscommunity OTNArchBeat? Free Event: Modern #Java Development, in/outside the Enterprise - May 30 - Redwood Shores, CA http://bit.ly/JIN9tf OracleBlogs WebLogic Partner Community Newsletter May 2012 http://ow.ly/1k5TeG Java Certification? Java SE 7 Fundamentals course now available On Demand. Watch a preview now: http://ow.ly/aWYgD Whitehorses Whiteblog: Native IO in WebLogic on Solaris 11 X64 (http://bit.ly/KGM4mp) NetBeans Team? Quick video of FindBugs Integration in #NetBeans IDE 7.2: http://ow.ly/aNece NetBeans Team #JavaFX Scene Builder Docs Updated for 2.2 and #NetBeans 7.2 dev builds: http://ow.ly/b7Nie Duncan Mills? New blog posting on implementing input field watermarks with ADF Faces 11.1.2 Click here #adf WebLogic Community? WebLogic Partner Community Newsletter May 2012 http://wp.me/p1LMIb-h4 OracleBlogs? UK OUG call for papersyour middleware success! http://ow.ly/1jNs49 Nicolas Lorain? Java tip: Deploying #JavaFX apps to multiple environments - JavaWorld http://buff.ly/KDADvu Adam Bien? Java EE and How to Specify The Unconventional With Convention Over Configuration [Free Article]: The free http://bit.ly/JEUkUf Owen Hughes and team?#Oracle #Exalogic #Performance: What? How? Why? Click here GlassFish? SecuritEE in the Cloud: Java EE 7 and the Cloud theme continue to move full steam ahead. In a PaaS environment http://bit.ly/K2RPte JDeveloper & ADF? How to Align Managed Bean Scope and Bean Data Control in Oracle ADF http://dlvr.it/1dngxQ Andrejus Baranovskis Missing New Feature in JDev (11.1.2.2.0) - ADF Methods Security http://fb.me/1jQM1enls OracleSupport_WLS? Tutorial on managing #HTTP Sessions in a #Weblogic #Cluster http://bit.ly/JshESe Oracle WebLogic? ZeroTurnaround developer report: #Spring keeps getting heavier, and #Java EE keeps getting lighter http://bit.ly/JDmKy2 JDeveloper & ADF? How to Search in Views - Part 4 || Oracle ADF http://dlvr.it/1dpDjZ WebLogic Community Java Message Service with Java and Spring Framework on Oracle WebLogic; Webcast May 15th 2012 http://wp.me/p1LMIb-gS Andreas Koop? new post ADF Bug or Feature? Non-Breaking Space outside required icon style http://bit.ly/KDZnUo Oracle WebLogic? Don't miss this month's WebLogic DevCast: WebLogic JMS and Spring JMS http://bit.ly/J6g2ST Tuesday May 15th 10:00am PT JDeveloper & ADF How To Disable SELECT COUNT Execution for ADF Table Rendering http://dlvr.it/1dqKH6 OracleSupport_WLS? #SSL and security has its own Information Center, http://bit.ly/LP8Vil for troubleshooting, install, config and more NetBeans Team? Featured #NetBeans plugin is @Codename_One for creating native apps for major mobile platforms: http://plugins.netbeans.org/ JDeveloper & ADF? Using JDeveloper HTTP Analyser to intercept/forward requests http://dlvr.it/1Yzl4J Nicolas Lorain? Create native looks for JavaFX applications: JavaFX-CSS-Themes · http://buff.ly/M0jel0 by Gregg Setzer Devoxx? Want to make the world a better place? Then get involved in Random Hacks of Kindness on June 2 - 3 in Belgium @ http://www.rhok.be #RHoK WebLogic Community top tweets WebLogic Partner Community – May 2012 Click here #WebLogicCommunity Michel Schildmeijer Oracle Traffic Director 11g http://lnkd.in/-mm3Vy Andrejus Baranovskis? Proactively Monitoring JDeveloper 11g IDE Heap Memory http://fb.me/16YZErPrx Arun Gupta? 80+ attendees building a #javaee6 application using NetBeans/WebLogic at Java Day, Istanbul fun times! http://pic.twitter.com/odY19daW A. Chatziantoniou? Just registered for the Oracle FMW Summer Camp in Lisbon. Looking forward to learn, meet friends and try to buy ice cream on the beach OTNArchBeat Another Myth Debunked: 200 Continuous Redeployments with WebLogic|@munz http://bit.ly/JiPyM7 Oracle WebLogic? Need to learn more on #WebLogic Server #JVM performance tuning? http://bit.ly/MN UxHx GlassFish? Dukes Choice Awards 2012 Nominations Are Open: 2012 Duke's Choice Award are open for nominations. These awards http://bit.ly/Ksk4U3 Justin Kestelyn? Major cloud-related announcements from Larry Ellison and Mark Hurd on June 6 http://bit.ly/KTJiII Nicolas Lorain Transparent Windows (Stage) with #JavaFX 2 : Adam Bien's Weblog http://j.mp/INgq8K WebLogic Community Web Services with JAX and Spring on WebLogic–Webcast May 30th 2012 #WebLogicCommunity #weblogic #opn JDeveloper & ADF Oracle ADF - How to work with Dates http://dlvr.it/1Y70zw OracleBlogs Web Services with JAX and Spring on WebLogicWebcast May 30th 2012 http://ow.ly/1k2WtO Adam Bien? Summer Java EE Workshops: 23.05, Amsterdam Airport Java EE Hacking, Without Airport. The dutch version of Airport http://bit.ly/JeP6hV JDeveloper & ADF ADF 11g: BC4J or EJB3. http://bit.ly/JVVFZF ADF EMG? Great discussion with JSF guru Andy Schwartz on the forum - 38 posts! Check it out: here Devoxx? Oracle (http://www.oracle.com ) joins Devoxx 2012 as the first Premium partner, welcome aboard! Nicolas Lorain Developing a Simple Todo Application using #JavaFX, #Java and #MongoDB- Part-1JavaBeat http://j.mp/IDGxLA Nicolas Lorain Preview of JavaFX 2.2 canvas feature > Harmonic Code: Death bitmaps could be beautiful... Part I http://buff.ly/KyAXg5 #JavaFX OTNArchBeat?? New York Coherence Special Interest Group (NYCSIG) - May 24 - NYC http://bit.ly/JzJcbT WebLogic Community iAS upgrade to WebLogic watch #C2B2 online seminar http://youtu.be/5m2CNUjBIGQ #WebLogicCommunity Ruth Collett? Join Oracle in #Joburg on May 21 for OTN Developer Day - sessions on #Java #JavaEE 6/7 and much more! http://bit.ly/IENwnD WebLogic Community? Sending out invitations to our advanced Fusion Middleware Summer Camps! Want to learn more register for the community Ruth Collett? Join @ArunGupta in Istanbul this Monday to hear the latest on #JavaEE 6/7 http://bit.ly/Je63cc GlassFish? NetBeans 7.2 Beta - Built for Speed, Deploy Apps to Oracle Cloud: NetBeans 7.2 Beta is now available. The http://bit.ly/LxMMTK Lucas Jellema My latest SlideShare upload : Java ain't scary - introducing Java to PL/SQ. here via @slideshare JDeveloper & ADF? #Developer #free#ADF training in #Scotland - June 13. More information: http://bit.ly/LbPLlf AMIS, Oracle & Java? AMIS behaalt als eerste in Nedeland de Oracle ADF specialisatie - Channelworld nieuwsChannelconnect: http://bit.ly/JzAcB4 WebLogic Community Web Services with JAX and Spring on WebLogic&ndash;Webcast May 30th 2012 http://wp.me/p1LMIb-gX Nicolas Lorain?@ JavaFX-based SimpleDateFormat Demonstrator http://j.mp/KFCVOi #JavaFX via Dustin Marx Oracle Exalogic? Are you an Oracle partner? There's news on the Oracle Partner Network about #Exalogic specializations - http://bit.ly/Mt3ANY JDeveloper & ADF Shorter URL for your ADF application http://dlvr.it/1XqNLY OTNArchBeat? Bay Area Coherence Special Interest Group (BACSIG) Meeting June 7 http://bit.ly/JAa0Lx OTNArchBeat? Java EE 6 Sample Application on WebLogic 12c: Conference Planner | @arungupta http://bit.ly/LPvof4 JDeveloper & ADF? Excellent example of Oracle ADF - Google Maps/Earth integration http://dlvr.it/1cbc80 JDeveloper & ADF Setting Up JDeveloper's Embedded WLS for MySQL http://dlvr.it/1c4b8P JDeveloper & ADF? Solution for Sharing Global User Data in ADF BC http://dlvr.it/1cc7SJ Java? Java Magazine May/June #javaee #javafx #javame #openJDK #hotspot #wicket #lotsmore http://ow.ly/aX07v Oracle WebLogic? http://bit.ly/JxQsnS if you have trouble finding the right #patchset when doing an upgrade to your #weblogic server OracleEnterpriseMgr 15 minutes to go before we start our Application Testing Suite 12.1 webcast. http://bit.ly/JHyTEe Learn from the lead PM what's new. #em12c Sten Vesterli Eating your own dog food - Oracle support site finally in ADF: http://lnkd.in/s6hg_p Adam Bien Project: "Jenever" (=poison) checked-in with GIT:here CU at http://workshops.adam-bien.com. Thanks for attending! OTNArchBeat Web Service Development with NetBeans and Testing with WebLogic Admin Console | @munz http://bit.ly/JcWk34 Please feel free to send us your news! And add your blog to our SOA blog wiki

    Read the article

  • Debian squeeze keyboard and touchpad not working / detected on laptop

    - by Esa
    They work before gdm3 starts. a connected mouse also stops working, but functions after removal and re-plug. no xorg.conf. log doesn't show any loading of drivers for kbd/touchpad [ 33.783] X.Org X Server 1.10.4 Release Date: 2011-08-19 [ 33.783] X Protocol Version 11, Revision 0 [ 33.783] Build Operating System: Linux 3.0.0-1-amd64 x86_64 Debian [ 33.783] Current Operating System: Linux sus 3.2.0-0.bpo.2-amd64 #1 SMP Sun Mar 25 10:33:35 UTC 2012 x86_64 [ 33.783] Kernel command line: BOOT_IMAGE=/boot/vmlinuz-3.2.0-0.bpo.2-amd64 root=UUID=8686f840-d165-4d1e-b995-2ebbd94aa3d2 ro quiet [ 33.783] Build Date: 28 August 2011 09:39:43PM [ 33.783] xorg-server 2:1.10.4-1~bpo60+1 (Cyril Brulebois <[email protected]>) [ 33.783] Current version of pixman: 0.16.4 [ 33.783] Before reporting problems, check http://wiki.x.org to make sure that you have the latest version. [ 33.783] Markers: (--) probed, (**) from config file, (==) default setting, (++) from command line, (!!) notice, (II) informational, (WW) warning, (EE) error, (NI) not implemented, (??) unknown. [ 33.783] (==) Log file: "/var/log/Xorg.0.log", Time: Wed Mar 28 09:34:04 2012 [ 33.837] (==) Using system config directory "/usr/share/X11/xorg.conf.d" [ 33.936] (==) No Layout section. Using the first Screen section. [ 33.936] (==) No screen section available. Using defaults. [ 33.936] (**) |-->Screen "Default Screen Section" (0) [ 33.936] (**) | |-->Monitor "<default monitor>" [ 33.936] (==) No monitor specified for screen "Default Screen Section". Using a default monitor configuration. [ 33.936] (==) Automatically adding devices [ 33.936] (==) Automatically enabling devices [ 34.164] (WW) The directory "/usr/share/fonts/X11/cyrillic" does not exist. [ 34.164] Entry deleted from font path. [ 34.226] (==) FontPath set to: /usr/share/fonts/X11/misc, /usr/share/fonts/X11/100dpi/:unscaled, /usr/share/fonts/X11/75dpi/:unscaled, /usr/share/fonts/X11/Type1, /usr/share/fonts/X11/100dpi, /usr/share/fonts/X11/75dpi, /var/lib/defoma/x-ttcidfont-conf.d/dirs/TrueType, built-ins [ 34.226] (==) ModulePath set to "/usr/lib/xorg/modules" [ 34.226] (II) The server relies on udev to provide the list of input devices. If no devices become available, reconfigure udev or disable AutoAddDevices. [ 34.226] (II) Loader magic: 0x7d3ae0 [ 34.226] (II) Module ABI versions: [ 34.226] X.Org ANSI C Emulation: 0.4 [ 34.226] X.Org Video Driver: 10.0 [ 34.226] X.Org XInput driver : 12.2 [ 34.226] X.Org Server Extension : 5.0 [ 34.227] (--) PCI:*(0:1:5:0) 1002:9712:103c:1661 rev 0, Mem @ 0xd0000000/268435456, 0xf1400000/65536, 0xf1300000/1048576, I/O @ 0x00008000/256 [ 34.227] (--) PCI: (0:2:0:0) 1002:6760:103c:1661 rev 0, Mem @ 0xe0000000/268435456, 0xf0300000/131072, I/O @ 0x00004000/256, BIOS @ 0x????????/131072 [ 34.227] (II) Open ACPI successful (/var/run/acpid.socket) [ 34.227] (II) LoadModule: "extmod" [ 34.249] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/extensions/libextmod.so [ 34.277] (II) Module extmod: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 34.277] compiled for 1.10.4, module version = 1.0.0 [ 34.277] Module class: X.Org Server Extension [ 34.277] ABI class: X.Org Server Extension, version 5.0 [ 34.277] (II) Loading extension SELinux [ 34.277] (II) Loading extension MIT-SCREEN-SAVER [ 34.277] (II) Loading extension XFree86-VidModeExtension [ 34.277] (II) Loading extension XFree86-DGA [ 34.277] (II) Loading extension DPMS [ 34.277] (II) Loading extension XVideo [ 34.277] (II) Loading extension XVideo-MotionCompensation [ 34.277] (II) Loading extension X-Resource [ 34.277] (II) LoadModule: "dbe" [ 34.277] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/extensions/libdbe.so [ 34.299] (II) Module dbe: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 34.299] compiled for 1.10.4, module version = 1.0.0 [ 34.299] Module class: X.Org Server Extension [ 34.299] ABI class: X.Org Server Extension, version 5.0 [ 34.299] (II) Loading extension DOUBLE-BUFFER [ 34.299] (II) LoadModule: "glx" [ 34.299] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/extensions/libglx.so [ 34.477] (II) Module glx: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 34.477] compiled for 1.10.4, module version = 1.0.0 [ 34.477] ABI class: X.Org Server Extension, version 5.0 [ 34.477] (==) AIGLX enabled [ 34.477] (II) Loading extension GLX [ 34.477] (II) LoadModule: "record" [ 34.478] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/extensions/librecord.so [ 34.481] (II) Module record: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 34.481] compiled for 1.10.4, module version = 1.13.0 [ 34.481] Module class: X.Org Server Extension [ 34.481] ABI class: X.Org Server Extension, version 5.0 [ 34.481] (II) Loading extension RECORD [ 34.481] (II) LoadModule: "dri" [ 34.481] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/extensions/libdri.so [ 34.512] (II) Module dri: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 34.512] compiled for 1.10.4, module version = 1.0.0 [ 34.512] ABI class: X.Org Server Extension, version 5.0 [ 34.512] (II) Loading extension XFree86-DRI [ 34.512] (II) LoadModule: "dri2" [ 34.512] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/extensions/libdri2.so [ 34.515] (II) Module dri2: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 34.515] compiled for 1.10.4, module version = 1.2.0 [ 34.515] ABI class: X.Org Server Extension, version 5.0 [ 34.515] (II) Loading extension DRI2 [ 34.515] (==) Matched ati as autoconfigured driver 0 [ 34.515] (==) Matched vesa as autoconfigured driver 1 [ 34.515] (==) Matched fbdev as autoconfigured driver 2 [ 34.515] (==) Assigned the driver to the xf86ConfigLayout [ 34.515] (II) LoadModule: "ati" [ 34.706] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/ati_drv.so [ 34.724] (II) Module ati: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 34.724] compiled for 1.10.3, module version = 6.14.2 [ 34.724] Module class: X.Org Video Driver [ 34.724] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 10.0 [ 34.724] (II) LoadModule: "radeon" [ 34.725] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/radeon_drv.so [ 34.923] (II) Module radeon: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 34.923] compiled for 1.10.3, module version = 6.14.2 [ 34.923] Module class: X.Org Video Driver [ 34.923] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 10.0 [ 34.945] (II) LoadModule: "vesa" [ 34.945] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/vesa_drv.so [ 34.988] (II) Module vesa: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 34.988] compiled for 1.10.3, module version = 2.3.0 [ 34.988] Module class: X.Org Video Driver [ 34.988] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 10.0 [ 34.988] (II) LoadModule: "fbdev" [ 34.988] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/fbdev_drv.so [ 35.020] (II) Module fbdev: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 35.020] compiled for 1.10.3, module version = 0.4.2 [ 35.020] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 10.0 [ 35.020] (II) RADEON: Driver for ATI Radeon chipsets: <snip> [ 35.023] (II) VESA: driver for VESA chipsets: vesa [ 35.023] (II) FBDEV: driver for framebuffer: fbdev [ 35.023] (++) using VT number 7 [ 35.033] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/radeon_drv.so [ 35.033] (II) [KMS] Kernel modesetting enabled. [ 35.033] (WW) Falling back to old probe method for vesa [ 35.034] (WW) Falling back to old probe method for fbdev [ 35.034] (II) Loading sub module "fbdevhw" [ 35.034] (II) LoadModule: "fbdevhw" [ 35.034] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/libfbdevhw.so [ 35.185] (II) Module fbdevhw: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 35.185] compiled for 1.10.4, module version = 0.0.2 [ 35.185] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 10.0 [ 35.288] (II) RADEON(0): Creating default Display subsection in Screen section "Default Screen Section" for depth/fbbpp 24/32 [ 35.288] (==) RADEON(0): Depth 24, (--) framebuffer bpp 32 [ 35.288] (II) RADEON(0): Pixel depth = 24 bits stored in 4 bytes (32 bpp pixmaps) [ 35.288] (==) RADEON(0): Default visual is TrueColor [ 35.288] (==) RADEON(0): RGB weight 888 [ 35.288] (II) RADEON(0): Using 8 bits per RGB (8 bit DAC) [ 35.288] (--) RADEON(0): Chipset: "ATI Mobility Radeon HD 4200" (ChipID = 0x9712) [ 35.288] (II) RADEON(0): PCI card detected [ 35.288] drmOpenDevice: node name is /dev/dri/card0 [ 35.288] drmOpenDevice: open result is 9, (OK) [ 35.288] drmOpenByBusid: Searching for BusID pci:0000:01:05.0 [ 35.288] drmOpenDevice: node name is /dev/dri/card0 [ 35.288] drmOpenDevice: open result is 9, (OK) [ 35.288] drmOpenByBusid: drmOpenMinor returns 9 [ 35.288] drmOpenByBusid: drmGetBusid reports pci:0000:01:05.0 [ 35.288] (II) Loading sub module "exa" [ 35.288] (II) LoadModule: "exa" [ 35.288] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/libexa.so [ 35.335] (II) Module exa: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 35.335] compiled for 1.10.4, module version = 2.5.0 [ 35.335] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 10.0 [ 35.335] (II) RADEON(0): KMS Color Tiling: disabled [ 35.335] (II) RADEON(0): KMS Pageflipping: enabled [ 35.335] (II) RADEON(0): SwapBuffers wait for vsync: enabled [ 35.360] (II) RADEON(0): Output VGA-0 has no monitor section [ 35.360] (II) RADEON(0): Output LVDS has no monitor section [ 35.364] (II) RADEON(0): Output HDMI-0 has no monitor section [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): EDID for output VGA-0 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): EDID for output LVDS [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Manufacturer: LGD Model: 2ac Serial#: 0 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Year: 2010 Week: 0 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): EDID Version: 1.3 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Digital Display Input [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Max Image Size [cm]: horiz.: 34 vert.: 19 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Gamma: 2.20 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): No DPMS capabilities specified [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Supported color encodings: RGB 4:4:4 YCrCb 4:4:4 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): First detailed timing is preferred mode [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): redX: 0.616 redY: 0.371 greenX: 0.355 greenY: 0.606 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): blueX: 0.152 blueY: 0.100 whiteX: 0.313 whiteY: 0.329 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Manufacturer's mask: 0 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Supported detailed timing: [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): clock: 69.3 MHz Image Size: 344 x 194 mm [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): h_active: 1366 h_sync: 1398 h_sync_end 1430 h_blank_end 1486 h_border: 0 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): v_active: 768 v_sync: 770 v_sync_end 774 v_blanking: 782 v_border: 0 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): LG Display [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): LP156WH2-TLQB [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): EDID (in hex): [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): 00ffffffffffff0030e4ac0200000000 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): 00140103802213780ac1259d5f5b9b27 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): 19505400000001010101010101010101 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): 010101010101121b567850000e302020 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): 240058c2100000190000000000000000 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): 00000000000000000000000000fe004c [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): 4720446973706c61790a2020000000fe [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): 004c503135365748322d544c514200c1 [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Printing probed modes for output LVDS [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "1366x768"x59.6 69.30 1366 1398 1430 1486 768 770 774 782 -hsync -vsync (46.6 kHz) [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "1280x720"x59.9 74.50 1280 1344 1472 1664 720 723 728 748 -hsync +vsync (44.8 kHz) [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "1152x768"x59.8 71.75 1152 1216 1328 1504 768 771 781 798 -hsync +vsync (47.7 kHz) [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "1024x768"x59.9 63.50 1024 1072 1176 1328 768 771 775 798 -hsync +vsync (47.8 kHz) [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "800x600"x59.9 38.25 800 832 912 1024 600 603 607 624 -hsync +vsync (37.4 kHz) [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "848x480"x59.7 31.50 848 872 952 1056 480 483 493 500 -hsync +vsync (29.8 kHz) [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "720x480"x59.7 26.75 720 744 808 896 480 483 493 500 -hsync +vsync (29.9 kHz) [ 35.388] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "640x480"x59.4 23.75 640 664 720 800 480 483 487 500 -hsync +vsync (29.7 kHz) [ 35.392] (II) RADEON(0): EDID for output HDMI-0 [ 35.392] (II) RADEON(0): Output VGA-0 disconnected [ 35.392] (II) RADEON(0): Output LVDS connected [ 35.392] (II) RADEON(0): Output HDMI-0 disconnected [ 35.392] (II) RADEON(0): Using exact sizes for initial modes [ 35.392] (II) RADEON(0): Output LVDS using initial mode 1366x768 [ 35.392] (II) RADEON(0): Using default gamma of (1.0, 1.0, 1.0) unless otherwise stated. [ 35.392] (II) RADEON(0): mem size init: gart size :1fdff000 vram size: s:10000000 visible:fba0000 [ 35.392] (II) RADEON(0): EXA: Driver will allow EXA pixmaps in VRAM [ 35.392] (==) RADEON(0): DPI set to (96, 96) [ 35.392] (II) Loading sub module "fb" [ 35.392] (II) LoadModule: "fb" [ 35.392] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/libfb.so [ 35.492] (II) Module fb: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 35.492] compiled for 1.10.4, module version = 1.0.0 [ 35.492] ABI class: X.Org ANSI C Emulation, version 0.4 [ 35.492] (II) Loading sub module "ramdac" [ 35.492] (II) LoadModule: "ramdac" [ 35.492] (II) Module "ramdac" already built-in [ 35.492] (II) UnloadModule: "vesa" [ 35.492] (II) Unloading vesa [ 35.492] (II) UnloadModule: "fbdev" [ 35.492] (II) Unloading fbdev [ 35.492] (II) UnloadModule: "fbdevhw" [ 35.492] (II) Unloading fbdevhw [ 35.492] (--) Depth 24 pixmap format is 32 bpp [ 35.492] (II) RADEON(0): [DRI2] Setup complete [ 35.492] (II) RADEON(0): [DRI2] DRI driver: r600 [ 35.492] (II) RADEON(0): Front buffer size: 4224K [ 35.492] (II) RADEON(0): VRAM usage limit set to 228096K [ 35.615] (==) RADEON(0): Backing store disabled [ 35.615] (II) RADEON(0): Direct rendering enabled [ 35.658] (II) RADEON(0): Setting EXA maxPitchBytes [ 35.658] (II) EXA(0): Driver allocated offscreen pixmaps [ 35.658] (II) EXA(0): Driver registered support for the following operations: [ 35.658] (II) Solid [ 35.658] (II) Copy [ 35.658] (II) Composite (RENDER acceleration) [ 35.658] (II) UploadToScreen [ 35.658] (II) DownloadFromScreen [ 35.687] (II) RADEON(0): Acceleration enabled [ 35.687] (==) RADEON(0): DPMS enabled [ 35.687] (==) RADEON(0): Silken mouse enabled [ 35.721] (II) RADEON(0): Set up textured video [ 35.721] (II) RADEON(0): RandR 1.2 enabled, ignore the following RandR disabled message. [ 35.721] (--) RandR disabled [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension Generic Event Extension [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension SHAPE [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension MIT-SHM [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension XInputExtension [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension XTEST [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension BIG-REQUESTS [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension SYNC [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension XKEYBOARD [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension XC-MISC [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension SECURITY [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension XINERAMA [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension XFIXES [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension RENDER [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension RANDR [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension COMPOSITE [ 35.721] (II) Initializing built-in extension DAMAGE [ 35.721] (II) SELinux: Disabled on system [ 35.982] (II) AIGLX: enabled GLX_MESA_copy_sub_buffer [ 35.982] (II) AIGLX: enabled GLX_INTEL_swap_event [ 35.982] (II) AIGLX: enabled GLX_SGI_swap_control and GLX_MESA_swap_control [ 35.982] (II) AIGLX: enabled GLX_SGI_make_current_read [ 35.982] (II) AIGLX: GLX_EXT_texture_from_pixmap backed by buffer objects [ 35.982] (II) AIGLX: Loaded and initialized /usr/lib/dri/r600_dri.so [ 35.982] (II) GLX: Initialized DRI2 GL provider for screen 0 [ 35.999] (II) RADEON(0): Setting screen physical size to 361 x 203 [ 43.896] (II) RADEON(0): EDID vendor "LGD", prod id 684 [ 43.896] (II) RADEON(0): Printing DDC gathered Modelines: [ 43.896] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "1366x768"x0.0 69.30 1366 1398 1430 1486 768 770 774 782 -hsync -vsync (46.6 kHz) [ 43.924] (II) RADEON(0): EDID vendor "LGD", prod id 684 [ 43.924] (II) RADEON(0): Printing DDC gathered Modelines: [ 43.924] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "1366x768"x0.0 69.30 1366 1398 1430 1486 768 770 774 782 -hsync -vsync (46.6 kHz) [ 43.988] (II) RADEON(0): EDID vendor "LGD", prod id 684 [ 43.988] (II) RADEON(0): Printing DDC gathered Modelines: [ 43.988] (II) RADEON(0): Modeline "1366x768"x0.0 69.30 1366 1398 1430 1486 768 770 774 782 -hsync -vsync (46.6 kHz) [ 67.375] (II) config/udev: Adding input device Logitech USB Optical Mouse (/dev/input/event1) [ 67.376] (**) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: Applying InputClass "evdev pointer catchall" [ 67.376] (II) LoadModule: "evdev" [ 67.376] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/input/evdev_drv.so [ 67.392] (II) Module evdev: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 67.392] compiled for 1.10.3, module version = 2.6.0 [ 67.392] Module class: X.Org XInput Driver [ 67.392] ABI class: X.Org XInput driver, version 12.2 [ 67.392] (II) Using input driver 'evdev' for 'Logitech USB Optical Mouse' [ 67.392] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/input/evdev_drv.so [ 67.392] (**) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: always reports core events [ 67.392] (**) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: Device: "/dev/input/event1" [ 67.392] (--) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: Found 12 mouse buttons [ 67.392] (--) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: Found scroll wheel(s) [ 67.392] (--) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: Found relative axes [ 67.392] (--) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: Found x and y relative axes [ 67.392] (II) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: Configuring as mouse [ 67.392] (II) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: Adding scrollwheel support [ 67.392] (**) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: YAxisMapping: buttons 4 and 5 [ 67.392] (**) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: EmulateWheelButton: 4, EmulateWheelInertia: 10, EmulateWheelTimeout: 200 [ 67.392] (**) Option "config_info" "udev:/sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:13.0/usb5/5-1/5-1:1.0/input/input14/event1" [ 67.392] (II) XINPUT: Adding extended input device "Logitech USB Optical Mouse" (type: MOUSE) [ 67.392] (II) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: initialized for relative axes. [ 67.392] (**) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: (accel) keeping acceleration scheme 1 [ 67.392] (**) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: (accel) acceleration profile 0 [ 67.392] (**) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: (accel) acceleration factor: 2.000 [ 67.392] (**) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: (accel) acceleration threshold: 4 [ 67.392] (II) config/udev: Adding input device Logitech USB Optical Mouse (/dev/input/mouse0) [ 67.392] (II) No input driver/identifier specified (ignoring) [ 78.692] (II) Logitech USB Optical Mouse: Close [ 78.692] (II) UnloadModule: "evdev" [ 78.692] (II) Unloading evdev

    Read the article

  • Introducing Data Annotations Extensions

    - by srkirkland
    Validation of user input is integral to building a modern web application, and ASP.NET MVC offers us a way to enforce business rules on both the client and server using Model Validation.  The recent release of ASP.NET MVC 3 has improved these offerings on the client side by introducing an unobtrusive validation library built on top of jquery.validation.  Out of the box MVC comes with support for Data Annotations (that is, System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations) and can be extended to support other frameworks.  Data Annotations Validation is becoming more popular and is being baked in to many other Microsoft offerings, including Entity Framework, though with MVC it only contains four validators: Range, Required, StringLength and Regular Expression.  The Data Annotations Extensions project attempts to augment these validators with additional attributes while maintaining the clean integration Data Annotations provides. A Quick Word About Data Annotations Extensions The Data Annotations Extensions project can be found at http://dataannotationsextensions.org/, and currently provides 11 additional validation attributes (ex: Email, EqualTo, Min/Max) on top of Data Annotations’ original 4.  You can find a current list of the validation attributes on the afore mentioned website. The core library provides server-side validation attributes that can be used in any .NET 4.0 project (no MVC dependency). There is also an easily pluggable client-side validation library which can be used in ASP.NET MVC 3 projects using unobtrusive jquery validation (only MVC3 included javascript files are required). On to the Preview Let’s say you had the following “Customer” domain model (or view model, depending on your project structure) in an MVC 3 project: public class Customer { public string Email { get; set; } public int Age { get; set; } public string ProfilePictureLocation { get; set; } } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } When it comes time to create/edit this Customer, you will probably have a CustomerController and a simple form that just uses one of the Html.EditorFor() methods that the ASP.NET MVC tooling generates for you (or you can write yourself).  It should look something like this: With no validation, the customer can enter nonsense for an email address, and then can even report their age as a negative number!  With the built-in Data Annotations validation, I could do a bit better by adding a Range to the age, adding a RegularExpression for email (yuck!), and adding some required attributes.  However, I’d still be able to report my age as 10.75 years old, and my profile picture could still be any string.  Let’s use Data Annotations along with this project, Data Annotations Extensions, and see what we can get: public class Customer { [Email] [Required] public string Email { get; set; }   [Integer] [Min(1, ErrorMessage="Unless you are benjamin button you are lying.")] [Required] public int Age { get; set; }   [FileExtensions("png|jpg|jpeg|gif")] public string ProfilePictureLocation { get; set; } } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } Now let’s try to put in some invalid values and see what happens: That is very nice validation, all done on the client side (will also be validated on the server).  Also, the Customer class validation attributes are very easy to read and understand. Another bonus: Since Data Annotations Extensions can integrate with MVC 3’s unobtrusive validation, no additional scripts are required! Now that we’ve seen our target, let’s take a look at how to get there within a new MVC 3 project. Adding Data Annotations Extensions To Your Project First we will File->New Project and create an ASP.NET MVC 3 project.  I am going to use Razor for these examples, but any view engine can be used in practice.  Now go into the NuGet Extension Manager (right click on references and select add Library Package Reference) and search for “DataAnnotationsExtensions.”  You should see the following two packages: The first package is for server-side validation scenarios, but since we are using MVC 3 and would like comprehensive sever and client validation support, click on the DataAnnotationsExtensions.MVC3 project and then click Install.  This will install the Data Annotations Extensions server and client validation DLLs along with David Ebbo’s web activator (which enables the validation attributes to be registered with MVC 3). Now that Data Annotations Extensions is installed you have all you need to start doing advanced model validation.  If you are already using Data Annotations in your project, just making use of the additional validation attributes will provide client and server validation automatically.  However, assuming you are starting with a blank project I’ll walk you through setting up a controller and model to test with. Creating Your Model In the Models folder, create a new User.cs file with a User class that you can use as a model.  To start with, I’ll use the following class: public class User { public string Email { get; set; } public string Password { get; set; } public string PasswordConfirm { get; set; } public string HomePage { get; set; } public int Age { get; set; } } Next, create a simple controller with at least a Create method, and then a matching Create view (note, you can do all of this via the MVC built-in tooling).  Your files will look something like this: UserController.cs: public class UserController : Controller { public ActionResult Create() { return View(new User()); }   [HttpPost] public ActionResult Create(User user) { if (!ModelState.IsValid) { return View(user); }   return Content("User valid!"); } } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } Create.cshtml: @model NuGetValidationTester.Models.User   @{ ViewBag.Title = "Create"; }   <h2>Create</h2>   <script src="@Url.Content("~/Scripts/jquery.validate.min.js")" type="text/javascript"></script> <script src="@Url.Content("~/Scripts/jquery.validate.unobtrusive.min.js")" type="text/javascript"></script>   @using (Html.BeginForm()) { @Html.ValidationSummary(true) <fieldset> <legend>User</legend> @Html.EditorForModel() <p> <input type="submit" value="Create" /> </p> </fieldset> } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } In the Create.cshtml view, note that we are referencing jquery validation and jquery unobtrusive (jquery is referenced in the layout page).  These MVC 3 included scripts are the only ones you need to enjoy both the basic Data Annotations validation as well as the validation additions available in Data Annotations Extensions.  These references are added by default when you use the MVC 3 “Add View” dialog on a modification template type. Now when we go to /User/Create we should see a form for editing a User Since we haven’t yet added any validation attributes, this form is valid as shown (including no password, email and an age of 0).  With the built-in Data Annotations attributes we can make some of the fields required, and we could use a range validator of maybe 1 to 110 on Age (of course we don’t want to leave out supercentenarians) but let’s go further and validate our input comprehensively using Data Annotations Extensions.  The new and improved User.cs model class. { [Required] [Email] public string Email { get; set; }   [Required] public string Password { get; set; }   [Required] [EqualTo("Password")] public string PasswordConfirm { get; set; }   [Url] public string HomePage { get; set; }   [Integer] [Min(1)] public int Age { get; set; } } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } Now let’s re-run our form and try to use some invalid values: All of the validation errors you see above occurred on the client, without ever even hitting submit.  The validation is also checked on the server, which is a good practice since client validation is easily bypassed. That’s all you need to do to start a new project and include Data Annotations Extensions, and of course you can integrate it into an existing project just as easily. Nitpickers Corner ASP.NET MVC 3 futures defines four new data annotations attributes which this project has as well: CreditCard, Email, Url and EqualTo.  Unfortunately referencing MVC 3 futures necessitates taking an dependency on MVC 3 in your model layer, which may be unadvisable in a multi-tiered project.  Data Annotations Extensions keeps the server and client side libraries separate so using the project’s validation attributes don’t require you to take any additional dependencies in your model layer which still allowing for the rich client validation experience if you are using MVC 3. Custom Error Message and Globalization: Since the Data Annotations Extensions are build on top of Data Annotations, you have the ability to define your own static error messages and even to use resource files for very customizable error messages. Available Validators: Please see the project site at http://dataannotationsextensions.org/ for an up-to-date list of the new validators included in this project.  As of this post, the following validators are available: CreditCard Date Digits Email EqualTo FileExtensions Integer Max Min Numeric Url Conclusion Hopefully I’ve illustrated how easy it is to add server and client validation to your MVC 3 projects, and how to easily you can extend the available validation options to meet real world needs. The Data Annotations Extensions project is fully open source under the BSD license.  Any feedback would be greatly appreciated.  More information than you require, along with links to the source code, is available at http://dataannotationsextensions.org/. Enjoy!

    Read the article

  • Confluence or apache on win server 2008 cant find scripts and images :(

    - by Ishak
    I am a newbie to both Tomcat and Apache. I have set the virtual hosts as described in Here. And JIRA works fine when i browse the URL jira.agmlab.com. However when i try to access Confluence(3.4.5) with confluence.agmlab.com the pages come in plain html, i can login and browse pages but there is no css or js so that my confluence pages look very ugly. what can possibly cause this and how to fix this? here is my virtual hosts definitions : # # Virtual Hosts # # If you want to maintain multiple domains/hostnames on your # machine you can setup VirtualHost containers for them. Most configurations # use only name-based virtual hosts so the server doesn't need to worry about # IP addresses. This is indicated by the asterisks in the directives below. # # Please see the documentation at # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/vhosts/> # for further details before you try to setup virtual hosts. # # You may use the command line option '-S' to verify your virtual host # configuration. # # Use name-based virtual hosting. # NameVirtualHost * # # VirtualHost example: # Almost any Apache directive may go into a VirtualHost container. # The first VirtualHost section is used for all requests that do not # match a ServerName or ServerAlias in any <VirtualHost> block. # <VirtualHost *> ServerName confluence.agmlab.com ProxyRequests Off ProxyPreserveHost On <Proxy *> Order deny,allow Allow from all </Proxy> ProxyPass / http://localhost:8081/confluence/ ProxyPassReverse / http://localhost:8081/confluence/ # ProxyHTMLURLMap /confluence/ / <Location /> Order allow,deny Allow from all </Location> </VirtualHost> <VirtualHost *> ServerName jira.agmlab.com ProxyRequests Off ProxyPreserveHost On <Proxy *> Order deny,allow Allow from all </Proxy> ProxyPass / http://localhost:8080/ ProxyPassReverse / http://localhost:8080/ <Location /> Order allow,deny Allow from all </Location> </VirtualHost> and i added 127.0.0.1 jira.agmlab.com 127.0.0.1 confluence.agmlab.com to my hosts file (i am using Win Server 2008 OS). here is part of the error log from Apache access.log file : 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/1.0/_/download/resources/confluence.web.resources:aui-forms/confluence-forms.css HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/3.4.5/_/download/batch/com.atlassian.confluence.keyboardshortcuts:confluence-keyboard-shortcuts/com.atlassian.confluence.keyboardshortcuts:confluence-keyboard-shortcuts.css HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/0.7/_/download/batch/com.atlassian.plugins.shortcuts.atlassian-shortcuts-module:shortcuts/com.atlassian.plugins.shortcuts.atlassian-shortcuts-module:shortcuts.css HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/1/_/download/superbatch/js/batch.js HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/1.0/_/download/batch/confluence.web.resources:login/confluence.web.resources:login.js HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/1/_/download/superbatch/css/batch.css?media=print HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/1/_/styles/combined.css HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/1.2.2/_/download/batch/com.atlassian.confluence.plugins.doctheme:splitter/com.atlassian.confluence.plugins.doctheme:splitter.js HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/1.0/_/download/batch/legacy.confluence.web.resources:prototype/legacy.confluence.web.resources:prototype.js HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/0.7/_/download/batch/com.atlassian.plugins.shortcuts.atlassian-shortcuts-module:shortcuts/com.atlassian.plugins.shortcuts.atlassian-shortcuts-module:shortcuts.js HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/3.4.5/_/download/batch/com.atlassian.confluence.keyboardshortcuts:confluence-keyboard-shortcuts/com.atlassian.confluence.keyboardshortcuts:confluence-keyboard-shortcuts.js HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/images/logo/confluence_48_white.png HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/opensearch/osd.action HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:13:34 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/_/images/logo/confluence_16.png HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:16:27 +0200] "POST /plugins/servlet/gadgets/security-tokens HTTP/1.1" 200 525 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:08 +0200] "GET /confluence/favicon.ico HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:08 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/_/images/logo/confluence_16.png HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:08 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/_/images/icons/profilepics/anonymous.png HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:08 +0200] "GET /confluence/images/logo/confluence_48_white.png HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:08 +0200] "GET /confluence/images/icons/star_grey.gif HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:08 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/_/images/icons/add_12.png HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:08 +0200] "GET /confluence/images/border/spacer.gif HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:11 +0200] "GET /confluence/favicon.ico HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:11 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/_/images/logo/confluence_16.png HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:12 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/_/images/icons/add_12.png HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:12 +0200] "GET /confluence/s/2035/1/_/images/icons/profilepics/anonymous.png HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:12 +0200] "GET /confluence/images/logo/confluence_48_white.png HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:12 +0200] "GET /confluence/images/border/spacer.gif HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 127.0.0.1 - - [03/Jan/2011:16:19:12 +0200] "GET /confluence/images/icons/star_grey.gif HTTP/1.1" 404 2788 I can see the pages properly with js and css and images when i use confluence with URL localhost:8081/confluence. i have just set the base url of confluence to "confluence.agmlab.com" and then restarted both confluence and apache but nothing changed, and i also checked settings for jira, and its base URL is localhost:8080 but it works fine. Can it be something related with the permissions defined in Win Server 2008 ? maybe there is not enough rights (such as read execute ) in some users, directories ??

    Read the article

  • Continuous Integration for SQL Server Part II – Integration Testing

    - by Ben Rees
    My previous post, on setting up Continuous Integration for SQL Server databases using GitHub, Bamboo and Red Gate’s tools, covered the first two parts of a simple Database Continuous Delivery process: Putting your database in to a source control system, and, Running a continuous integration process, each time changes are checked in. However there is, of course, a lot more to to Continuous Delivery than that. Specifically, in addition to the above: Putting some actual integration tests in to the CI process (otherwise, they don’t really do much, do they!?), Deploying the database changes with a managed, automated approach, Monitoring what you’ve just put live, to make sure you haven’t broken anything. This post will detail how to set up a very simple pipeline for implementing the first of these (continuous integration testing). NB: A lot of the setup in this post is built on top of the configuration from before, so it might be difficult to implement this post without running through part I first. There’ll then be a third post on automated database deployment followed by a final post dealing with the last item – monitoring changes on the live system. In the previous post, I used a mixture of Red Gate products and other 3rd party software – GitHub and Atlassian Bamboo specifically. This was partly because I believe most people work in an heterogeneous environment, using software from different vendors to suit their purposes and I wanted to show how this could work for this process. For example, you could easily substitute Atlassian’s BitBucket or Stash for GitHub, depending on your needs, or use an alternative CI server such as TeamCity, TFS or Jenkins. However, in this, post, I’ll be mostly using Red Gate products only (other than tSQLt). I would do this, firstly because I work for Red Gate. However, I also think that in the area of Database Delivery processes, nobody else has the offerings to implement this process fully – so I didn’t have any choice!   Background on Continuous Delivery For me, a great source of information on what makes a proper Continuous Delivery process is the Jez Humble and David Farley classic: Continuous Delivery – Reliable Software Releases through Build, Test, and Deployment Automation This book is not of course, primarily about databases, and the process I outline here and in the previous article is a gross simplification of what Jez and David describe (not least because it’s that much harder for databases!). However, a lot of the principles that they describe can be equally applied to database development and, I would argue, should be. As I say however, what I describe here is a very simple version of what would be required for a full production process. A couple of useful resources on handling some of these complexities can be found in the following two references: Refactoring Databases – Evolutionary Database Design, by Scott J Ambler and Pramod J. Sadalage Versioning Databases – Branching and Merging, by Scott Allen In particular, I don’t deal at all with the issues of multiple branches and merging of those branches, an issue made particularly acute by the use of GitHub. The other point worth making is that, in the words of Martin Fowler: Continuous Delivery is about keeping your application in a state where it is always able to deploy into production.   I.e. we are not talking about continuously delivery updates to the production database every time someone checks in an amendment to a stored procedure. That is possible (and what Martin calls Continuous Deployment). However, again, that’s more than I describe in this article. And I doubt I need to remind DBAs or Developers to Proceed with Caution!   Integration Testing Back to something practical. The next stage, building on our set up from the previous article, is to add in some integration tests to the process. As I say, the CI process, though interesting, isn’t enormously useful without some sort of test process running. For this we’ll use the tSQLt framework, an open source framework designed specifically for running SQL Server tests. tSQLt is part of Red Gate’s SQL Test found on http://www.red-gate.com/products/sql-development/sql-test/ or can be downloaded separately from www.tsqlt.org - though I’ll provide a step-by-step guide below for setting this up. Getting tSQLt set up via SQL Test Click on the link http://www.red-gate.com/products/sql-development/sql-test/ and click on the blue Download button to download the Red Gate SQL Test product, if not already installed. Follow the install process for SQL Test to install the SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS) plugin on to your machine, if not already installed. Open SSMS. You should now see SQL Test under the Tools menu:   Clicking this link will give you the basic SQL Test dialogue: As yet, though we’ve installed the SQL Test product we haven’t yet installed the tSQLt test framework on to any particular database. To do this, we need to add our RedGateApp database using this dialogue, by clicking on the + Add Database to SQL Test… link, selecting the RedGateApp database and clicking the Add Database link:   In the next screen, SQL Test describes what will be installed on the database for the tSQLt framework. Also in this dialogue, uncheck the “Add SQL Cop tests” option (shown below). SQL Cop is a great set of pre-defined tests that work within the tSQLt framework to check the general health of your SQL Server database. However, we won’t be using them in this particular simple example: Once you’ve clicked on the OK button, the changes described in the dialogue will be made to your database. Some of these are shown in the left-hand-side below: We’ve now installed the framework. However, we haven’t actually created any tests, so this will be the next step. But, before we proceed, we’ve made an update to our database so should, again check this in to source control, adding comments as required:   Also worth a quick check that your build still runs with the new additions!: (And a quick check of the RedGateAppCI database shows that the changes have been made).   Creating and Testing a Unit Test There are, of course, a lot of very interesting unit tests that you could and should set up for a database. The great thing about the tSQLt framework is that you can write these in SQL. The example I’m going to use here is pretty Mickey Mouse – our database table is going to include some email addresses as reference data and I want to check whether these are all in a correct email format. Nothing clever but it illustrates the process and hopefully shows the method by which more interesting tests could be set up. Adding Reference Data to our Database To start, I want to add some reference data to my database, and have this source controlled (as well as the schema). First of all I need to add some data in to my solitary table – this can be done a number of ways, but I’ll do this in SSMS for simplicity: I then add some reference data to my table: Currently this reference data just exists in the database. For proper integration testing, this needs to form part of the source-controlled version of the database – and so needs to be added to the Git repository. This can be done via SQL Source Control, though first a Primary Key needs to be added to the table. Right click the table, select Design, then right-click on the first “id” row. Then click on “Set Primary Key”: NB: once this change is made, click Save to save the change to the table. Then, to source control this reference data, right click on the table (dbo.Email) and selecting the following option:   In the next screen, link the data in the Email table, by selecting it from the list and clicking “save and close”: We should at this point re-commit the changes (both the addition of the Primary Key, and the data) to the Git repo. NB: From here on, I won’t show screenshots for the GitHub side of things – it’s the same each time: whenever a change is made in SQL Source Control and committed to your local folder, you then need to sync this in the GitHub Windows client (as this is where the build server, Bamboo is taking it from). An interesting point to note here, when these changes are committed in SQL Source Control (right-click database and select “Commit Changes to Source Control..”): The display gives a warning about possibly needing a migration script for the “Add Primary Key” step of the changes. This isn’t actually necessary in this case, but this mechanism would allow you to create override scripts to replace the default change scripts created by the SQL Compare engine (which runs underneath SQL Source Control). Ignoring this message (!), we add a comment and commit the changes to Git. I then sync these, run a build (or the build gets run automatically), and check that the data is being deployed over to the target RedGateAppCI database:   Creating and Running the Test As I mention, the test I’m going to use here is a very simple one - are the email addresses in my reference table valid? This isn’t of course, a full test of email validation (I expect the email addresses I’ve chosen here aren’t really the those of the Fab Four) – but just a very basic check of format used. I’ve taken the relevant SQL from this Stack Overflow article. In SSMS select “SQL Test” from the Tools menu, then click on + New Test: In the next screen, give your new test a name, and also enter a name in the Test Class box (test classes are schemas that help you keep things organised). Also check that the database in which the test is going to be created is correct – RedGateApp in this example: Click “Create Test”. After closing a couple of subsequent dialogues, you’ll see a dummy script for the test, that needs filling in:   We now need to define the SQL for our test. As mentioned before, tSQLt allows you to write your unit tests in T-SQL, and the code I’m going to use here is as below. This needs to be copied and pasted in to the query window, to replace the default given by tSQLt: –  Basic email check test ALTER PROCEDURE [MyChecks].[test Check Email Addresses] AS BEGIN SET NOCOUNT ON         Declare @Output VarChar(max)     Set @Output = ”       SELECT  @Output = @Output + Email +Char(13) + Char(10) FROM dbo.Email WHERE email NOT LIKE ‘%_@__%.__%’       If @Output > ”         Begin             Set @Output = Char(13) + Char(10)                           + @Output             EXEC tSQLt.Fail@Output         End   END;   Once this script is entered, hit execute to add the Stored Procedure to the database. Before committing the test to source control,  it’s worth just checking that it works! For a positive test, click on “SQL Test” from the Tools menu, then click Run Tests. You should see output like the following: - a green tick to indicate success! But of course, what we also need to do is test that this is actually doing something by showing a failed test. Edit one of the email addresses in your table to an incorrect format: Now, re-run the same SQL Test as before and you’ll see the following: Great – we now know that our test is really doing something! You’ll also see a useful error message at the bottom of SSMS: (leave the email address as invalid for now, for the next steps). The next stage is to check this new test in to source control again, by right-clicking on the database and checking in the changes with a commit message (and not forgetting to sync in the GitHub client):   Checking that the Tests are Running as Integration Tests After the changes above are made, and after a build has run on Bamboo (manual or automatic), looking at the Stored Procedures for the RedGateAppCI, the SPROC for the new test has been moved over to the database. However this is not exactly what we were after. We didn’t want to just copy objects from one database to another, but actually run the tests as part of the build/integration test process. I.e. we’re continuously checking any changes we make (in this case, to the reference data emails), to ensure we’re not breaking a test that we’ve set up. The behaviour we want to see is that, if we check in static data that is incorrect (as we did in step 9 above) and we have the tSQLt test set up, then our build in Bamboo should fail. However, re-running the build shows the following: - sadly, a successful build! To make sure the tSQLt tests are run as part of the integration test, we need to amend a switch in the Red Gate CI config file. First, navigate to file sqlCI.targets in your working folder: Edit this document, make the following change, save the document, then commit and sync this change in the GitHub client: <!-- tSQLt tests --> <!-- Optional --> <!-- To run tSQLt tests in source control for the database, enter true. --> <enableTsqlt>true</enableTsqlt> Now, if we re-run the build in Bamboo (NB: I’ve moved to a new server here, hence different address and build number): - superb, a broken build!! The error message isn’t great here, so to get more detailed info, click on the full build log link on this page (below the fold). The interesting part of the log shown is towards the bottom. Pulling out this part:   21-Jun-2013 11:35:19 Build FAILED. 21-Jun-2013 11:35:19 21-Jun-2013 11:35:19 "C:\Users\Administrator\bamboo-home\xml-data\build-dir\RGA-RGP-JOB1\sqlCI.proj" (default target) (1) -> 21-Jun-2013 11:35:19 (sqlCI target) -> 21-Jun-2013 11:35:19 EXEC : sqlCI error occurred: RedGate.Deploy.SqlServerDbPackage.Shared.Exceptions.InvalidSqlException: Test Case Summary: 1 test case(s) executed, 0 succeeded, 1 failed, 0 errored. [C:\Users\Administrator\bamboo-home\xml-data\build-dir\RGA-RGP-JOB1\sqlCI.proj] 21-Jun-2013 11:35:19 EXEC : sqlCI error occurred: [MyChecks].[test Check Email Addresses] failed: [C:\Users\Administrator\bamboo-home\xml-data\build-dir\RGA-RGP-JOB1\sqlCI.proj] 21-Jun-2013 11:35:19 EXEC : sqlCI error occurred: ringo.starr@beatles [C:\Users\Administrator\bamboo-home\xml-data\build-dir\RGA-RGP-JOB1\sqlCI.proj] 21-Jun-2013 11:35:19 EXEC : sqlCI error occurred: [C:\Users\Administrator\bamboo-home\xml-data\build-dir\RGA-RGP-JOB1\sqlCI.proj] 21-Jun-2013 11:35:19 EXEC : sqlCI error occurred: +----------------------+ [C:\Users\Administrator\bamboo-home\xml-data\build-dir\RGA-RGP-JOB1\sqlCI.proj] 21-Jun-2013 11:35:19 EXEC : sqlCI error occurred: |Test Execution Summary| [C:\Users\Administrator\bamboo-home\xml-data\build-dir\RGA-RGP-JOB1\sqlCI.proj]   As a final check, we should make sure that, if we now fix this error, the build succeeds. So in SSMS, I’m going to correct the invalid email address, then check this change in to SQL Source Control (with a comment), commit to GitHub, and re-run the build:   This should have fixed the build: It worked! Summary This has been a very quick run through the implementation of CI for databases, including tSQLt tests to test whether your database updates are working. The next post in this series will focus on automated deployment – we’ve tested our database changes, how can we now deploy these to target sites?  

    Read the article

< Previous Page | 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537  | Next Page >